Skip to main content

Full text of "Technograph"

See other formats


LIBRARY 

OF  THE. 

U  N  1  VERSITY 

OF    1LLI  NOIS 

G205 
TH 


V. 


• 


NOTICE:  Return  or  renew  all  Library  Materials!  The  Minimum  Fee  lor 
each  Lost  Book  is  $50.00. 

The  person  charging  this  material  is  responsible  for 
its  return  to  the  library  from  which  it  was  withdrawn 
on  or  before  the  Latest  Date  stamped  below. 

Theft,  mutilation,  and  underlining  of  books  are  reasons  for  discipli- 
nary action  and  may  result  in  dismissal  from  the  University. 
To  renew  call  Telephone  Center,  333-8400 


UNIVERSITY 


ILLINOIS    LIBRARY 


URBANA-CHAMPAIGN 


L161—  O-1096 


\ 


■? 


<k 


vS^ 


^o 


fc 

\ 


% 


» 

The  TECHNOGRAPH 


UNIVERSITY   OF   ILLINOIS. 

1890-91. 


CONTENTS. 

The  Schools  of  Mechanical  and  Civil  Engineering  in  the  University  of  Illi 

Selim  II.  Peabody ^ 

The  Topographical  Survey  of  the  City  of  St.  Louis,  Mo.      Oliver  W.  Connet .  .  .  . 

1  aces  for  Cable  Roads     F.  W.  Kichart i ; 

The  Four- Mile  Crib  of  the  Chicago  Water-Works     Simeon  C.  Co/Ion i  - 

Notes  from  Mechanical  Engineering  Theses 

'ck  for  Everybody—/.  O.  Baker 

(Tubs  and  Gutters—/''.  A'.   Williamson 

A  Remarkable  Sink- Hole  —A.  A.  Mather 

Rope  Driving — F.  L.  Bunion 

Notes  on  a  Railroad  Re- Survey — B.  A.  Wail 

Square  Drift-Bolts — J.  II.  Powell  and  A.  E.  Harvey 

if  Brick  Pavements—  A.  D.   Thompson .41 

Interlocked  vs.  Unprotected  Railroad  Grade  Crossings  —  W.  M.  Hay 

Notes  on  Aluminum  and  its  Alloys—/?.  J.  Keene 

Effect  of  Counterbalance  on  Locomotives-   S.  D.  Baivden 51 

Prints  from  Etched  Metals—  L.   W.  Peabody 

Notes  on  an  Electric  Street  Railway  Plant — W.  A.  Boyd.  . 

Lime-Cement  Mortar 

Railway  Transition  Curves — Arthur  N.   Talbot. ... 


PRICE    50    CENTS 

address,  technograph,  university  or  illinois, 
Champaign,  III. 


BOURBON  COPPER  AND  BRASS  WORKS 


o 

CO 


it    *> 

Q. 

cr 

Q_ 

CD 
<*3 

O 
O 

CX 

198,  200,  202,  204  E.  FRONT  ST. 
CINCINNATI,     O. 


\ 


<k 


% 


% 


No.  5. 


THE  TECHNOGRAPH. 

Published  by  the  Civil  Engineers'  Club  and  the 
Mechanical  Engineers'  Society  of  the 

UNIVERSITY  OF  ILLINOIS. 


CHAMPAiaN,   ILLINOIS, 


1S90=91. 


BLOOMINGTON,  ILL.: 
Pantagraph  Printing  and  Stationery  Company. cu 


The  Technograph. 

No.  5.  UNIVERSITY  OF  ILLINOIS.  1890-91. 

THE  SCHOOLS  OF  MECHANICAL  AND  CIVIL  ENGINEER- 
ING IN  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  ILLINOIS. 
By  Selim  H.  Peabody,  LL.D.,  Regent. 

The  first  movements  toward  the  establishment  of  schools  of 
Civil  Engineering  in  America  sprang  from  the  demand  for  compe- 
tent engineers  of  railways  consequent  upon  the  rapid  development 
of  that  system  of  transportation  in  the  third  decade  of  this  cent- 
ury. A  second  and  larger  impulse  came  about  thirty  years  later, 
when  Congress  made  its  first  subsidy  for  scientific  training  in  the 
Land  Grant  Act  of  1862. 

The  state  of  Illinois  was  among  the  first  to  move  in  the  found- 
ing, under  the  provisions  of  this  act,  of  a  school  of  practical  and 
experimental  science,  chartered  in  1867  and  opened  to  students  in 
March,  1868.  In  those  days  the  differentiation  between  the  subjects 
of  civil  and  mechanical  engineering  began  to  be  more  fully  appre- 
ciated, and  the  institution  here  begun  was  one  of  the  earliest  to  pro- 
vide a  distinct  course  of  study,  with  separate  equipment  in  each  of 
these  lines  of  engineering  work.  The  workshops  here  erected  were 
the  first  distinctively  educational  shops  opened  in  America,  those 
at  Worcester  following  soon  after.  But  the  Worcester  shops  were 
manufacturing  shops,  with  educational  tendencies,  rather  than  shops 
purely  and  simply  for  instruction.  The  primary  object  of  the 
shops  at  Champaign  has  been  instruction,  with  very  little  consider- 
ation of  manufacturing  results.  Dr.  Runkle,  of  the  Institute  at 
Boston,  has  been  called  the  father  of  shop-training  in  America,  a 
distinction  which  he  surely  never  claimed  for  himself.  The  shops 
at  Champaign  were  built,  equipped,  and  opened  to  students  seven 
years  before  the  first  shop -work  was  done  at  the  Massachusetts  In- 
stitute of  Technology.     A  full  exhibit  from  our  shops,  including  a 


B  THE  TECENOORAPH. 

line  of  work  analogous  to  the  so-called  "Russian"  system,  a  kind 
of  work  practiced  here  for  at  least  four  years  previous,  was  placed 
in  the  Centennial  Exposition  in  Philadelphia  in  1876,  and  a  diploma 
was  awarded  to  this  University  therefor.  Dr.  Runkle's  school-shop 
in  1877,  was  no  more  an  innovation  or  a  discovery  than  is  Dr. 
Elliot's  proposition  of  to-day  that  college  students  of  larger 
capacity  may  graduate  with  a  bachelor's  degree  after  three  years' 
study.  The  University  of  Illinois  graduates  a  student  when  he  has 
completed  his  course,  and  does  not  ask  whether  he  has  occupied 
three,  four,  or  five  years  in  so  doing. 

The  shops  at  Champaign  have  sent  out  full  lines  of  its  courses 
of  shop  instruction,  including  blue-print  copies  of  its  drawings,  and 
finished  specimens  of  work,  to  various  institutions  scattered  from 
the  Atlantic  to  the  Pacific  coasts.  It  was  more  complimentary 
than  ingenuous  for  the  distinguished  president  of  an  Eastern  Col- 
lege, to  publish  a  complete  series  of  fac-similes  of  our  shop-draw- 
ings, reduced  copies  of  blue-prints  obtained  from  us,  dimensions 
and  all  completely  figured,  with  the  statement  that  the  series  was 
perhaps  the  most  complete  extant,  but  without  any  credit  to  the 
institution  where  they  originated,  or  any  recognition  of  indebt- 
edness thereto.  The  University  of  Illinois  has  never  sought  to  pro- 
tect for  herself  such  products,  but  has  freely  distributed  them  to 
all  inquirers,  but  she  believes  that  she  may  modestly  reclaim  her 
own.  She  farther  confidently  claims,  that  in  America  there  was  no 
earlier  practice  in  "Manual  Training"  than  hers,  and  that  nowhere 
else  has  that  practice  been  more  consistent  or  more  successful. 
But  this  has  been  restricted  to  its  proper  sphere  as  an  incident  and 
adjunct  to  other  earnest  and  scholarly  culture,  and  never  has  been 
put  forward  unduly  as  a  hobby,  or  a  fad. 

All  our  engineering  courses  begin  substantially  at  the  same 
point.  The  entering  student  is  expected  to  show  evidences  of  fair 
previous  training,  covering  the  branches  taught  in  primary  and 
grammar  schools,  and  most  of  those  taught  in  the  High  schools. 
In  particular,  he  should  be  well  versed  in  Elementary  Algebra,  and 
in  Geometry,  both  plane  and  solid.  He  should  have  had  some 
practical  contact  with  elementary  science;  and  because  his  oppor- 
tunities will  probably  have  been  better  in  these  subjects,  Physics, 
Physiology,  and  Botany  are  named.  The  desire  is  that  he  shall 
have  thus  acquired  some  training,  some  discipline,  while  the  mere 
knowledge  of  facts  is  deemed  of  less  consequence.  It  must  be 
admitted  that  the  ideals  are  not  realized  as  often  as  could  be  wished. 


THE  TECHNOGRAPH.  7 

A  good  knowledge  of  the  English  language  is  deemed  indispensable. 
The  applicant  must  not  be  less  than  fifteen  years  of  age,  and  ordi- 
narily should  have  reached  eighteen.  If  to  these  qualifications 
could  be  added  a  good  practice  in  drawing,  both  free-hand  and 
with  instruments,  and  some  careful  linguistic  culture,  the  results 
would  be  very  advantageous.  It  is  to  be  hoped  that  these  may  be 
required  at  a  day  not  far  distant. 

The  new  student  is  entered  at  once  upon  a  course  of  higher 
mathematical  work,  for  the  double  purpose  of  its  exact  discipline, 
and  of  its  needful  facility  for  solving  the  multitudinous  problems 
which  occur  in  the  higher  departments  of  his  engineering  study.  It 
is  meant  that  he  shall  acquire  the  power  of  sifting  matters  to  their 
fundamental  principles,  and  for  this  purpose  the  mathematical 
training  is  absolutely  indispensable.  Parallel  with  this  opens  care- 
ful training  in  the  exact  power  of  expression  in  drawing,  iu  its 
mathematical  rather  than  its  artistic  phase.  Parallel,  also,  comes 
the  concrete  applications  of  these  subjects,  in  the  treatment  of 
materials,  wood,  iron,  sand,  etc.,  in  the  shop.  In  each  of  these 
lines  of  work,  the  prime  excellence  to  be  sought  and  inculcated  is 
precision,  exactness,  accuracy.  Without  these,  effort  is  wasted, 
and  habits  worse  than  useless  are  inculcated.  In  the  shop,  par- 
ticularly, is  this  noticeable.  A  few  enter  the  shop  showing  a  native 
inaptitude  for  shop  methods;  but  for  one  such,  there  are  many  who 
show  that  for  the  want  of  proper  training  in  their  preceding  work, 
stimulated  only  by  that  which  fond  parents  suppose  to  be  the  cor- 
uscation of  mechanical  genius,  or  by  training  inefficiently  given  in 
the  early  years,  before  the  lad  has  any  real  appreciation  of  earnest 
purposes,  that  which  they  have  learned  as  to  "the  use  of  tools"  is 
a  delusion  and  a  snare;  that  much  pains  must  be  taken  to  unlearn 
bad  methods  and  to  erase  bad  ideas,  before  good  ones  can  be  incul- 
cated. 

These  three,  the  shop,  the  drawing  room,  and  the  mathematical 
class  room,  lie  so  at  the  foundations  that  they  can  not  be  avoided. 
To  furnish  some  element  of  broader  culture,  at  the  same  time,  work 
is  added  in  some  modern  language.     So  ends  the  first  year's  work. 

In  the  second  year,  the  mathematical  work  proceeds.  Physics 
comes  in  as  an  important  theoretical  and  experimental  study.  The 
differentiation  of  the  departments  begins.  The  civils  enter  in  their 
work  of  surveying  in  its  various  phases,  including  an  intimate 
acquaintance  with  the  most  refined  instruments  of  measurement. 
The   mechanicals   pass   from    instruction   to    construction;    terms 


THE  TECHNOGRAPH. 

which  indicate  tendencies  rather  than  differences,  since  every  piece 
of  work  involves  both  elements.  Finished  machines  begin  to  show 
themselves  in  the  shop,  as  the  results  of  work  that  begins  in  the 
designing  room,  and  follows  through  all  the  practical  departments. 

In  the  third  year  the  schools  unite  in  the  investigation  of  the 
problems  of  mechanics,  resistance  of  materials,  hydraulics,  etc.; 
problems  exhaustively  discussed  by  the  aid  of  the  mathematical 
processes  previously  mastered.  But  each  school  becomes  yet  more 
specialized.  The  mechanicals  discuss  the  elements  of  mechanism; 
the  quality  of  materials;  the  combination  of  machinery.  The 
civils  are  busy  with  the  intricacies  of  construction  of  railways,  and 
of  municipal  improvements. 

In  the  fourth  year  are  reached  the  higher  specialties  in  each 
department.  The  civil's  surveying  has  developed  into  the  discus- 
sion of  geodetic  problems;  their  investigation  of  the  material  ele- 
ments and  of  mechanical  problems,  culminates  in  the  designing  of 
masonry  constructions,  and  in  the  theoretical  and  practical  investi- 
gation of  devices  for  transit  over  the  land,  through  the  air,  and 
over  and  under  the  waters,  and  the  everlasting  hills.  In  like  man- 
ner the  mechanicals  are  burrowing  into  the  vital  constitutions  of 
motors  and  appliers  of  force,  and  the  methods  of  harnessing  the 
powers  of  heat,  flowing  water,  and  electric  currents,  to  the  service 
of  men. 

In  all  this,  it  is  hoped  that  one  mistake,  a  serious  one,  may  be 
avoided.  These  students,  ardent,  earnest,  industrious,  successful, 
must  not  come  to  their  graduation  with  the  supposition  that  they 
have  mastered  the  whole  of  the  sciences  that  pervade  their  special- 
ties. These  subjects  are  broad  as  the  world,  and  as  long  as  eternity. 
Only  those  principles  that  are  fundamental  can  be  grasped  as  the 
product  of  study  for  four  brief  years,  if,  indeed,  there  should  be 
time  and  strength  for  so  much  as  that.  The  engineer,  the  mechani- 
cian, must  be  content  to  be  a  student  during  all  the  years  of  the 
longest  life  that  may  be  granted  for  his  efforts. 

Too  many  students  wish  to  restrict  themselves  to  those  special- 
ties in  their  respective  courses  which  they  imagine  are  of  direct  and 
particular  "use."  The  reason  is,  that  they  have  a  limited,  an  inade- 
quate interpretation  of  the  word  "use."  Had  they  the  opportunity 
to  reconstruct  man,  they  would  make  him  only  senses,  fingers,  and 
stomach.  The  University  courses  have  endeavored  in  some  meas- 
ure, quite  too  small,  to  supplement  these  vigorous,  technical 
studies,  with  others,  which  may  tend  toward  the  humanities,  which 


THE  TECHNOGRAPH.  9 

may  broaden  vision,  stimulate  aspirations,  enlarge  conceptions  of 
life,  and  capacities  for  enjoyment.  The  engineer  should  not  be  a 
mere  machine,  typified  by  his  own  steam  engine,  or  dynamo,  or 
theodolite;  he  should  strive  to  grow  into  a  large-hearted,  acute, 
brainy,  and  efficient  man.  He  must  not  only  have  great  capacities, 
but  fair  means  of  showing  to  the  world  such  capacities.  He  should 
be  able  to  write  clearly  and  accurately;  to  speak  forcibly  and 
effectively;  to  be  a  power  in  the  sphere  of  his  action.  He  has  an 
account  to  give,  as  well  for  the  talents  which  he  may  acquire,  as 
for  those  which  were  given  him  to  possess  and  to  enjoy. 

In  this  brief  account  of  the  schools  of  civil  and  mechanical 
engineering,  most  has  been  said  of  the  present,  the  actual.  The 
possible,  in  the  future,  is  yet  larger  and  more  worthy.  The  ideals 
are  not  yet  realized;  there  is  much  to  do  before  they  can  be  real- 
ized, requiring  combined  and  persistent  effort.  The  progress  made 
is  but  earnest  of  that  which  is  sought,  and  for  which  the  aid  of 
students,  instructors,  the  public,  and  the  state,  is  invoked. 


THE   TOPOGRAPHICAL    SURVEY   OF   THE    CITY  OF 
ST.  LOUIS,  MISSOURI. 

By  Oliver  W.  Connet.* 

No  city  contemplating  any  extensive  improvements  can  afford 
to  be  without  a  careful  topographical  survey  and  an  accurate  con- 
tour map.  The  survey  should  cover  the  whole  city,  and  the  map 
should  be  on  a  large  scale  and  show  the  streets,  alleys,  public 
grounds,  water  courses,  contours,  etc.  The  information  necessary 
for  the  location,  plans,  and  preliminary  estimates  for  sewers,  street 
improvement,  and  other  public  works,  can  not  be  obtained  so 
quickly  or  at  so  little  cost  in  any  other  way;  and  the  study  of  their 
location  can  not  be  so  general  and  comprehensive  as  may  be  made 
from  such  a  map. 

This  has  been  recognized  in  St.  Louis,  and  such  a  survey  is  in 
progress  in  this  city.  The  survey  was  authorized  by  an  ordinance 
approved  March  21,  1889,  and  the  field  wojk  was  begun  in  June  of 
that  year.  The  purpose  of  the  survey,  as  stated  in  the  ordinance, 
is  for  the  perfecting  of  plans  for  the  drainage  of  the  city,  and  for 
use  in  locating  and  opening  streets  and  alleys,  and  in  the  establish- 

*For  three  years  a  member  of  the  class  of  '87,  and  at  present  assistant  engineer  on  the  topo- 
graphical survey  of  St.  Louis. 


10  THE  TECHHOGRAPH. 

i 

ing  of  grades  for  streets  and  public  places.  The  survey  is  under 
the  supervision  of  the  Sewer  Commissioner,  Mr.  Robert  E.  Mc- 
Math,  and  in  direct  charge  of  Mr.  B.  H.  Colby,  first  assistant 
engineer.  The  force  authorized  by  the  ordinance  is  as  follows,  viz.: 
one  first  assistant  engineer  in  charge,  one  precise  level  man,  one 
topographer,  one  draughtsman,  three  recorders,  and  as  many  field 
hands  as  are  necessary.  The  ordinance  directs  that  the  survey 
shall  be  begun  in  that  part  of  the  city  where  least  provision  is  made 
for  drainage  and  where  the  increasing  population  makes  plans  for 
improvements  necessary. 

In  compliance  with  this  provision  the  survey  was  begun  in  the 
central  portion  of  the  city  west  of  Grand  avenue.  Up  to  the  date 
of  this  paper,  February  i,  189 1,  the  field  work  is  nearly  finished  in 
the  district  bounded  on  the  north  by  Florissant  avenue,  on  the  east 
by  Grand  avenue,  on  the  south  by  Tyler  avenue,  and  on  the  west 
by  the  City  Limits. 

The  work  of  the  survey  may  be  divided  into  four  heads:  Tri- 
angulation,  Precise  Levels,  Topography,  and  Office  Work.  The 
first  two  are  in  a  sense  preliminary  to  the  topography,  but  of  pri- 
mary importance  as  regards  the  accuracy  of  the  survey. 

Triangulation. 

The  triangulation,  which  is  the  basis  of  the  survey,  has  been 
carried  forward  as  the  work  has  progressed.  The  area  covered  by 
the  triangulation  is  about  30  square  miles. 

About  one  half  of  the  stations  are  marked  by  limestone  monu- 
ments 6x6x36  inches,  set  in  the  ground.  The  remainder  are  on 
the  roofs  of  buildings.  The  system  has  fifty-four  stations,  and 
sixty-five  triangles.  The  stations  are  so  distributed  that  they  are 
on  the  average  less  than  a  mile  apart,  but  the  average  length  of  the 
sides  of  the  triangles  is  about  one  and  one  half  miles.  In  most 
cases  the  three  angles  of  the  triangle  have  been  read  by  the  repeti- 
tion method. 

The  system  is  based  on  a  line  in  the  trans-continental  triangu- 
lation of  the  United  States  Coast  Survey.  The  line  is  from  a  point 
on  the  old  stand-pipe  to  the  tip  of  the  dome  of  the  Insane  Asylum. 
The  latitude  and  longitude  of  these  two  points,  with  the  length  and 
azimuth  of  the  line  joining  them,  were  taken  from  the  Coast  Survey 
reports. 

In  the  report  of  the  Sewer  Commissioner  for  the  year  1890, 
Mr.  Colby  gives  the  following:     "The  average  closure  of  triangles 


THE  TECHNOGBAPH.  11 

has  been  a  little  over  four  seconds.  The  angles  of  each  triangle 
were  summed,  and  the  deficiency  or  excess  from  1800  was  divided 
equally  among  the  three  angles  before  computing  the  sides.  No 
other  adjustment  has  been  made,  or  thought  necessary.  Several 
checks  have  been  made  upon  length  of  sides,  and  discrepancies 
have  been  from  i  in  80,000  to  1  in  180,000." 

It  is  expected  that  an  ordinance  will  be  passed  requiring  that 
all  surveys  of  streets  and  subdivisions  be  connected  with  the  tri- 
angulation,  and  that  the  true  azimuth  of  all  lines  be  recorded.  Such 
a  requirement  is  necessary  because  the  present  records  do  not  fur- 
nish sufficient  data  to  plot  the  streets  on  the  maps,  or  retrace  the 
lines  on  the  ground.  In  anticipation  of  this  a  number  of  triangula- 
tion  stations  have  been  connected  with,  which  were  not  necessary 
for  the  topographical  survey. 

Precise  Levels. 

Precise  levels  have  been  run  on  the  principal  streets  west  of 
Grand  avenue.  Benches  have  been  established  on  an  average  four 
to  a  mile  along  the  lines  run.  The  lines  have  been  so  connected 
that  no  point  in  the  district  covered  is  more  than  one  half  mile 
from  a  precise  bench.  There  have  been  361  benches  established, 
and  the  distance  run  in  duplicate  is  about  92.5  miles.  These 
benches  are  to  be  the  standard  for  all  of  the  departments  and  for 
all  elevations  in  the  city.  For  the  convenience  of  the  other  depart- 
ments and  of  engineers  and  surveyors  in  general,  a  list  of  the 
benches  with  their  description  and  elevations  is  published.  The 
greater  part  of  the  benches  are  on  the  stone  foundations  of  bridges 
and  buildings,  but  in  parts  of  the  city  where  such  marks  could  not 
be  had,  a  burnt  tile  slab,  4x18x18  inches,  with  a  copper  bolt 
leaded  into  the  center,  was  buried  to  a  depth  of  four  feet.  The 
point  is  accessible  through  a  tile  pipe  specially  made  for  the  pur- 
pose. 

The  limit  of  error  allowed  is  0.0208  feet  into  the  square  root  of 
the  distance  in  miles.  In  the  above  mentioned  report  the  follow- 
ing figures  are  given,  showing  the  degree  of  accuracy  with  which 
the  work  has  been  done:  "The  average  closure  per  mile  has  been 
0.013  feet.  The  probable  error  in  the  determination  of  a  single 
mile  of  the  work  is  0.001  feet.  If  the  work  lay  in  a  continuous 
line,  the  elevation  of  the  last  bench,  as  determined  from  the  first, 
would  be  known  within  a  probable  error  of  0.066  feet." 


12  I  III-.    TECHNOGRAPH. 

Topography. 

The  value  of  the  survey  depends  on  the  amount  and  reliability 
of  the  information  given.  To  this  end  every  precaution  has  been 
used  to  secure  this  result.  The  best  instruments  have  been  pro- 
cured, experienced  men  employed,  and  the  greatest  care  required. 
All  possible  checks  are  taken  in  the  field  to  prevent  errors  from 
creeping  into  the  work. 

The  stadia  has  been  employed  as  the  best  and  most  rapid 
method  of  locating  points  and  obtaining  their  elevation.  By  this 
method  300  points  may  be  located  in  a  day.  The  party  is  com- 
posed of  the  topographer,  one  recorder,  three  stadia-men,  and  one 
general-utility  man.  The  instrument  used  is  a  complete  Buff  & 
Berger  transit,  reading  horizontal  angles  to  10  seconds  and  vertical 
angles  to  1  minute.  The  vertical  circle  has  each  quadrant  gradu- 
ated from  o°  to  900  so  that  the  angle  of  depression  or  elevation 
may  be  read  with  the  telescope  direct,  or  inverted,  thus  eliminating 
errors  of  adjustment  of  the  vertical  circle.  The  level  is  attached 
to  the  verniers  in  such  a  way  that  the  zeros  may  be  brought  into  a 
horizontal  plane   without   disturbing   the   leveling    screws. 

The  stadia  boards  used  are  12  feet  long,  and  represent  a  dis- 
tance of  458  meters,  or  the  value  of  100  meters  is  2.62  feet  on  the 
board.  The  figures  used  on  the  stadia  are  similar  to  those  used  on 
the  United  States  Lake  Survey.  Distances  are  read  in  meters,  and 
elevations  are  obtained  in  feet  by  means  of  Ockerson  &  Teeple's 
tables.  Oak  stakes  ixixio  inches  are  used  for  stadia  stations, 
and  are  driven  nearly  flush  with  the  ground. 

All  lines  of  stadia  courses  begin  and  end  on  triangulation 
stations,  or  other  stadia  stations  which  are  in  connecting  lines. 
Both  verniers  are  read  to  10  seconds  on  all  stadia  courses.  In  this 
way  the  azimuth  is  repeatedly  checked  in  the  field,  and  data  ob- 
tained by  which  the  location  of  the  stations  may  be  checked  when 
the  co-ordinates  are  computed.  The  error  of  closure  after  making 
the  known  corrections  for  inclination  and  graduation  of  rods,  is 
about  1  in  800.  The  average  error  of  closure  of  azimuth  is  about 
1  minute  5  seconds  for  each  line  run,  or  n  seconds  per  station. 
All  azimuth  readings  are  with  reference  to  the  true  meridian. 

Elevations  are  carried  by  means  of  distance  and  vertical  angle. 
The  height  of  instrument  is  carefully  measured  with  a  rod  (gradu- 
ated for  the  purpose),  the  middle  wire  is  brought  to  the  correspond- 
ing point  on  the  board,  and  the  level  on  the  vertical  circle  is 
brought  to  the  center  of  the  tube  before  the  angle  is  read.     It  is 


THE  TECHXOGRAPH. 


13 


remarkable  with  what  accuracy  elevations  may  be  carried  when 
these  precautions  are  taken  and  care  is  exercised  to  keep  the 
instrument  in  adjustment.  The  average  error  of  elevations  is  less 
than  0.2  of  a  foot  per  mile. 

The  notes  are  kept  in  well  bound  books,  5x8  inches  in  size, 
made  especially  for  the  survey.  They  contain  100  double  pages, 
and  have  the  heading  of  the  columns  printed  on  every  page,  as 
shown  below: 

Left-hand  Page. 


Object. 

Distance. 

Vernier  A. 

Vernier  B. 

Vertical  Angle. 

Right-hand  Page. 


Difference  of 
Elevation. 

Elevation. 

Remarks. 

The  last  column  is  used  for  descriptions  of  bench  marks,  cor- 
ner stones,  stadia  stations,  etc.,  or  for  sketches. 

The  area  covered  (up  to  the  present  time)  by  the  topography 
is  14,930  acres,  or  23^  square  miles.  The  elevations  of  54,500 
points  have  been  determined,  or  an  average  of  3.65  points  per  acre. 

The  time  occupied  in  field  work  is  as  follows:  Triangulation,  62 
days;  precise  levels,  114  days;  topography,  248  days;  total,  424  days. 

Office  Work. 

The  office  work  consists  in  reducing  the  field  notes,  and  plot- 
ting. The  latitude  and  longitude  of  all  triangulation  stations  are 
determined  to  hundredths  of  a  second,  and  also  their  linear  dis- 
tance from  the  two  nearest  minutes  of  latitude  and  longitude.  The 
azimuth,  and  length  of  the  sides  of  the  triangles  are  computed. 

The  rectangular  co-ordinates  of  all  the  stadia  stations,  with 
reference  to  the  nearest  20  seconds  of  latitude  and  longitude,  are 
computed,  adjusted,  and  recorded  in  a  book  for  that  purpose. 
This  is  an  important  part  of  the  work,  as  by  this  means  the  error 
of  closure  is  systematically  adjusted,  and  checks  the  location  of  the 
stations  before  the  plotting  is  done.  The  plotting  is  done  on  heavy 
mounted  egg-shell  paper,  cut  into  charts  antiquarian  size.  The 
charts  are  projected  by  the  polyconic  method.  The  tables  based 
on  the  development  of  the  Clarke  spheroid,  published  in  the  report 
of  the  Coast  and  Geodetic  Survey  for  1884,  are  employed.  The 
scale  is  1  in  2,400. 


11  /'///•;   TECHNOGRAPH. 

The  charts  have  the  parallels  and  meridians  for  every  20  sec- 
onds of  latitude  and  longitude  on  them,  and  triangulation  and 
stadia  stations  are  plotted  by  rectangular  co  ordinates  from  them. 
Other  points  are  plotted  by  polar  co-ordinates.  The  streets  and 
alleys  are  plotted  by  means  of  connections  made  on  the  ground 
and  from  data  obtained  from  the  street  department. 

The  precise  level  notes  are  reduced,  and  a  list  of  benches,  with 
elevations  and  descriptions,  prepared  for  publication  in  the  annual 
report  of  the  Sewer  Commissioner.  The  differences  of  elevation 
of  the  points  located  by  stadia  are  found  by  means  of  Ockerson's 
stadia  tables,  and  the  elevations  determined  and  recorded  in  a  col- 
umn of  the  field  book.  In  finding  the  elevation  of  stakes,  the 
mean  of  the  differences  found  by  the  readings  taken  in  both  direc- 
tions is  used;  and  the  error  of  closing  between  benches  is  divided 
equally  on  the  stakes  in  the  line. 

All  the  points  taken  are  plotted,  and  their  elevations  written  in 
small  figures  on  the  charts  and  the  contours  drawn  in.  The  contour 
planes  are  taken  3  feet  apart.  The  charts  are  finished  in  ink.  The 
elevations  of  the  contours,  names  of  streets,  etc.,  are  to  be  printed 
on  them  by  means  of  a  small  hand  press. 

Cost. 
The  exact  cost  of  the  survey  can  not  be  given  until  it  is  com- 
pleted, but  some  facts  concerning  the  cost  of  the  work,  up  to  the 
present  time,  will  be  of  interest.  The  total  cost  of  the  survey  to 
February  1,  1891,  is  $18,827.68.  This  includes  salaries,  new  instru- 
ments, office  furniture,  transportation,  etc.  Deducting  $1,927.68, 
for  the  value  of  instruments,  etc.,  on  hand,  leaves  a  balance  of 
$16,900.00  as  the  actual  cost  of  the  survey.  The  cost  of  the  differ- 
ent branches  of  the  work  has  been  as  follows: 

Triangulation $1,812.00       or       11  per  cent. 

Precise  levels 2,762.00       or       16         " 

Topography 6,060.00       or       36         •« 

Office  work 6,266.06       or       37         " 

Total   $16,900.00         100         " 

The  cost  of  running  precise  levels  has  been  $30.00  per  mile, 
run  in  duplicate.  The  average  cost  of  the  parties,  per  day,  includ- 
ing transportation,  instruments,  etc.,  is  as  follows: 

Triangulation $29. 25 

Precise  levels   24.25 

Topography 24.50 

The  average  total  cost  per  square  mile  is  $724.50,  or  a  little 

over  $1.13  per  acre. 


THE  TECHNOGRAPH.  15 

GRIP  FACES  FOR  CABLE    ROADS. 
By  F.  W.  Richart,  '91. 

One  of  the  heaviest  expenses  of  the  cable  system  of  street  car 
propulsion,  is  that  of  renewing  cables.  Another  item  of  consider- 
able expense,  is  the  necessary  frequent  renewal  of  grip  faces  or  dies, 
as  they  are  usually  called.  The  effect  of  various  materials  used  for 
dies,  on  the  life  of  the  cable,  and  the  relative  life  of  dies  made  of 
these  different  materials,  is  a  subject  which  is  of  considerable  impor- 
tance to  Cable  Companies,  but  has  not  received  much  attention  in 
technical  publications. 

Very  little  information  could  be  obtained  concesning  the  earlier 
forms  of  grips.  Some  of  the  earlier  cable  roads  in  San  Francisco 
used  the  Paine  grip,  which  had  solid  dies,  with  a  pair  of  carrying 
pulleys  at  each  end,  forced  out  beyond  the  dies  by  springs,  and  which 
carried  the  cable,  preventing  it  from  rubbing  the  dies  when  they 
were  released.  The  carrying  pulleys  are  not  usually  used  in  more 
modern  practice.  Another  form  of  grip  designed  to  prevent  wear 
of  the  cable,  consisted  of  two  rectangular  steel  bars  having  rounded 
ends,  each  having  a  dove-tail  groove  the  entire  circumference  in  the 
long  direction.  In  these  grooves  short  brass  blocks  were  placed,  so 
that  when  the  grip  was  slackened  the  brass  blocks  slid  round,  taking 
the  wear  instead  of  the  cable. 

This  was  once  used  on  the  Brooklyn  bridge,  but  was  unsatisfac- 
tory. The  grip  used  on  that  bridge  at  present  consists  of  small 
sheaves  with  grooves  facing,  which  turn  when  the  grip  is  slack,  but 
on  increasing  the  pressure  the  friction  becomes  sufficient  to  stop 
their  turning  and  move  the  car.  This  grip  has  been  used  on  cable 
roads  with  unsatisfactory  results.  The  tendency  is  to  lengthen  the 
cable  and  diminish  the  diameter.  All  Kansas  City  lines  use  dies 
made  of  the  Worrell  alloy,  which  is  made  of  cast-iron  and  another 
metal  supposed  to  be  copper.  The  endurance  of  the  dies  is  two 
weeks  on  two  lines,  and  is  given  by  two  authorities  as  two  weeks  and 
seven  weeks  on  the  third.  The  one  who  gives  two  weeks  is  probably 
the  best  authority.  The  Locust  Street  Line,  of  St.  Louis,  use  a  phos- 
phor bronze  die,  which  gives  satisfactory  results,  lasts  as  long  as  six 
weeks,  and  wears  the  cable  less  than  soft  (presumably  cast)  iron. 
The  Chicago  City  Railway  Co.  use  a  grip  die  which  lasts  one  month. 
The  composition  is  copper  60  lbs.,  tin  10  lbs.,  zinc  13  oz.,  lead  18  oz. 

Quite  a  number  of  roads  have  tried   cast-iron  with  unsatisfac- 
tory results.     It  can  be  used  but  a  short  time  before  renewal  is  nec- 
— 2 


le 


THE   TECHNOGRAPH. 


essary.  A  silicated  iron  has  been  used  on  one  of  the  Chicago  roads, 
lasting  about  five  times  as  long  as  ordinary  cast-iron. 

Cast-steel  is  being  used  to  a  considerable  extent  at  present,  and 
with  very  satisfactory  results.  It  lasts  several  times  longer  than  any 
of  the  alloys  or  cast  iron,  and,  according  to  Mr.  Van  Vleck,  wears 
the  cable  but  a  tritle  more.  The  Vogel  Cable  Construction  Co. 
state  that  gripping  dies  are  made  of  the  hardest  material  possible, 
and  when  the  expense  is  not  too  great  of  tool  steel. 

The  conclusions  to  be  drawn  from  the  tables  below  are  not 
numerous.  We  can  see  that  cast-iron  does  not  last  any  considerable 
length  of  time.  Some  grades  of  cast-steel  are  poor,  but  good  grades 
give  greater  wear  than  any  other  material  cited.  Of  alloys,  phos- 
phor bronze  wears  longest.  The  alloy  used  by  the  Chicago  City 
Railway  Co.  seems  to  give  very  good  wear,  but  is  evidently  expen- 
sive. As  to  the  life  of  cables  as  effected  by  different  materials  used 
in  the  dies,  the  average  life  of  Kansas  City  cables  from  the  table  is 
10.S4  months  with  dies  made  of  the  Worrell  alloy,  while  the  Wash- 
ington and  Georgetown  cable  has  not  yet  been  renewed  after  eleven 
months  use,  with  cast-steel  dies.  The  only  difference  in  the  two 
cables  is  in  the  number  of  wires,  the  diameter  being  the  same.  The 
former  has  96  and  the  latter  1 14  wires  in  six  strands,  with  hemp  core. 

e  of  Grip  Dies  of  Various  Mati  i;i 


Road. 


Material. 


Chic. 


Chicago  <  ity  Ky. .  . 
1  .ind 
.mi  Ky 


Kans.i 

politan. 


ble.    . . 



I  .iiir 


<  ':i~i  iron 

Silicated     iron    (spe 

cial  mixtun 
Cast-steel 


Len'th 


i9»    I 

20'  •    J 

19" 


|i9" 
20" 


(  'olllj. 


el 1 


Worrell  alloy. 


i 


le         i 


14" 

10" 


Life. 


144  miles.  . 
225  miles.  . 

700  miles.  . 
368  miles. . 

2009  miles. 

2250  miles. 
(  >ne  month 


Two  weeks. . 

Two   weeks  [ 
40  to  50  das  j 


15  day  - 

6  weeks 

1  i<i   ;  weeks 


Remarks. 


Not  Chi'go 

Co.'s  make. 
Chicago    Cm.    S. 
Co.'s  make. 


Have  not  been  re- 
moved afte  14 '  j 
months'  use . 

Dies,  two 

each   7"  . 

Two  authorities. 


Made  by  ( long 
den  1  Iraki 

L'gtta  me'd  Irom 
scale   drawing. 


THE  TEChXOaitAl'II. 


17 


Life  ok  Cables. 


Street. 


Kansas  City. 
E.  5th.... 
W.  5th.... 
E.  12th... 
W.  I2th. .. 
W.  i8th... 
E.  i8th... 
Westport . , 
Walnut  .  . . 
15th 


Holmes . 


Main   Line.  .  . , 

Washington  . .  . 

Troost  Ave 
Washington  .... 

7th 

Chicago 

Chi.  Cy.  Ry.  Co 


Lgth.  cable, 

feet.        Life  cable. 


32300- 


30500. 
14200. 
29500. 

22000. 


33000. 


6  months. . 

7  months. . 
12  months. 
7  months.  . 
7  months. . 
18  months. 
14  months. 
4  months. 
15^    mo.. 

Has     been 
in  22  mo.  . 


Speed. 


1 

^J 

0 

ST 

vO 

C 

n 

(/i 

1 

13 

<T> 

"1 

miles, 
miles, 
miles. 

miles. 


8  months. .  8  miles. 

9  months. .  12  miles. 
12  months.  9  miles, 


On  II  mo. 


40000  mi. 


Character 
road. 


Very 

crooked 


13  per  cent 
grade 


Very  ■ 
crooked 

10  per  cent 

grades 

18.53      Pei" 

cent  grade 


Almost 
straight 


Remarks. 


J  Met'p'li'an  Line 


y  Grand  Ave  Line 


K.  C.  Cable  Line 
tftt 

— ! •" 

Business  very  he'vy 


THE   FOUR-MILE  CRIB  OF  THE  CHICAGO  WATER- 
WORKS. 

By  Simeon  C.  Colton,  '85. 

Engineer  for  the  Contractors. 

This  piece  of  work  has  received  slight  notice  in  engineering 
perio  dicals,  but  not  by  any  means  such  as  its  prominence  warrants. 
When  this  massive  steel  and  timber  crib  left  the  Chicago  har- 
bor, it  carried  a  cargo  one  half  larger  than  ever  floated  on  the  great 
lakes,  and  carried  this  with  a  draught  of  only  14  feet. 

The  construction  of  this  structure  was  begun  on  January  7, 
1889,  by  the  FitzSimons  &  Connell  Co.,  by  placing  the  launching 
ways.  These  ways  consisted  of  nine  sets  of  12  x  12-inch  oak  timbers 
placed  at  an  incline  of  three  fourths  of  an  inch  to  a  foot  to  the  face 
of  the  dock,  which  was  cut  down  to  a  foot  above  high  water.  The 
ways  were  covered  with  4  x  t  2-inch  oak,  and  on  these  slides  was  built 
the  ti  mber  bottom.  For  lubricating  the  ways  a  mixture  of  tallow 
and  graphite  was  used. 

The  shoe,  12  inches  high,  consisted  of  two  parallel  timbers 
12  x  1 2 -inch  pine,  and  formed  a  polygon  of  24  sides,  the  greatest  diam- 
eter being  124  feet.     See  Fig.  1. 


1- 


THE  TECHSOGRAPH 


Fig.  i.     Four-Mii.k  Crib. 


THE  TECHNOGRAPH.  19 

Upon  this  shoe  the  timber  was  laid,  upon  blocking  on  the  ways, 
and  firmly  bolted  with  32-inch  round  drift  bolts,  forming  a  platform 
2  feet  thick  and  125  feet  in  diameter.  All  timber  in  these  two  courses 
was  surfaced  on  four  sides  to  make  more  compact  work  and  give  a 
better  caulking  seam.  Upon  this  bottom  a  70-foot  circle  was  struck, 
and  between  the  circle  and  the  sides  of  the  polygon  (26^  feet)  the 
timber  was  carried  up  13  feet  higher.  This  ring  was  planked  verti- 
cally both  outside  and  inside  with  6-inch  oak  securely  drift-bolted 
to  the  pine  and  thoroughly  caulked.  The  inlet  ports  to  the  center 
well  were  placed  5  feet  up  and  were  5  feet  square.  These  ports  were 
closed  by  gates  and  stoppers  before  the  launching  of  the  structure. 

With  the  planking  and  bottom  well  caulked,  the  structure  was 
ready  for  the  launch,  except  that  the  2  foot  bottom  would  stand 
neither  the  launching  strains  nor  the  pressure  caused  by  the  dis- 
placement. The  plan  which  had  been  adopted  at  the  outset  of  the 
work  was  to  load  the  structure  to  draw  27  feet  and  keep  the  interior 
well  dry,  thus  this  clear  space  of  70  feet  was  expected  to  withstand 
a  pressure  of  1,600  lbs.  per  square  foot,  or  a  total  pressure  of  3,000 
tons.  In  order  to  cope  with  this  pressure  we  placed  five  Howe  trusses 
20  feet  high  within  this  well,  and  built  the  ends  fast  into  the  outside 
circle  of  timber.  The  lower  chord,  composed  of  four  pieces  5x12, 
was  securely  bolted  to  another  chord  underneath  the  bottom  of  the 
crib.  One  truss  was  placed  on  the  center  line  of  the  well,  and  two 
others  each  side,  10  and  22  feet  distant.  In  order  to  further  help 
the  trusses,  a  central  tower  30  feet  high  was  built  of  12x12  timbers 
in  bents  of  three,  and  capped  with  14x16  oak.  Through  the  oak 
cap,  twenty  1^5 -inch  round  rods  were  passed,  leading  down  at  an 
angle  of  300  and  securely  fastened  by  pins  and  lugs  to  the  inside 
steel  cylinder.  Notwithstanding  these  precautions,  as  well  as  the 
fact  that  the  crib  was  sunk  to  a  depth  of  only  25  feet  before  the 
water  was  allowed  to  enter  the  center  well,  the  posts  on  the  tower 
were  crushed  into  the  caps  1  to  2  inches,  and  the  oak  cap  was  badly 
bent. 

Upon  the  fourteenth  course  of  timber  in  the  ring  the  steel  cyl- 
inder was  started.  This  cylinder  was  124  feet  in  diameter  at  the 
bottom,  and  118  feet  at  the  top,  and  30  feet  high,  and  consisted  of 
plates  -vg-inches  thick,  4  feet  wide,  and  16  feet  long.  Each  sheet 
butted  in  the  ring,  and  lapped  the  rings  above  and  below.  Lead 
was  used  in  the  butted  seams  to  secure  a  water-tight  joint.  The 
vertical  sheets  were  joined  by  angles,  these  same  angles  receiving 
the  ends  of  a  bulkhead  sheet,  -?b -inches  thick,  4  feet  wide,  and  24 


THE  TECHNOGRAPH. 

feet  long.  The  inner  cylinder  was  parallel  to,  and  27  feet  away 
from  the  outside.  Thus  we  have  the  metal  structure,  two  cylinders 
124  feet  and  70  feet  in  diameter,  joined  by  24  solid  bulkheads  placed 
on  radial  lines,  the  whole  weighing  430  tons.  There  were  some 
96,000  rivets  in  the  work,  which  fitted  so  well  that  no  holes  required 
than  a  drift  to  draw  them  into  place.  All  seams  were  caulked, 
so  that  the  steel  work  was  absolutely  tight. 

The  cylinder  was  filled  with  Portland  cement  concrete,  consist- 
ing of  1  part  cement,  3  parts  sand,  and  6  parts  stone.  The  stone 
was  broken  to  pass  a  i)4-inch  ring.  Rubble  stone  were  imbedded  in 
the  concrete,  each  stone  being  carefully  laid  flat  and  surrounded 
with  concrete  well  tamped.  The  concrete  was  mixed  by  a  screw 
mixer  (Caldwell's)  mounted  on  a  scow,  and  was  able  to  turn  out 
250  cubic  yards  in  10  hours.  All  concrete  and  stone  was  handled 
by  a  double-ended  derrick  mounted  on  a  movable  platform  over 
the  center  well;  this  derrick  being  able  to  reach  every  point  in  the 
circle  of  the  crib,  and  was  able  to  lift  15  tons. 

When  about  1,500  cubic  yards  of  concrete  had  been  placed 
aboard,  the  crib  was  towed  into  position  a  distance  of  about  four 
miles.  Two  tugs  towed  her  about  three  miles  in  two  hours.  Once 
started  on  her  journey  the  water  was  let  into  the  inner  well  by 
means  of  valves  placed  in  the  sides  for  that  purpose,  and  after 
reaching  the  site  some  200  cords  of  stone  were  placed  on  top  of 
the  iron  to  secure  the  structure  against  damage  by  storms  during 
the  night.  The  crib,  when  sunk,  showed  about  8  feet  above  the 
water,  and  up  to  date  has  settled  about  30  inches  into  the  clay 
bottom,  leaving  the  top  of  the  steel  5  feet  6  inches  out  of  the  water. 

Work  was  stopped  for  the  season  November  5,  1889,  with  about 
one  half  the  pockets  filled  with  concrete.  Upon  resuming  opera- 
tions June  11,  1890,  it  was  found  that  the  winter's  storms  had 
caused  a  slight  unevenness  in  the  settlement,  but  had  not  damaged 
the  structure  a  particle. 

Stone  setting  was  commenced  July  21,  and  the  masonry  por- 
tion of  the  structure  was  completed  September  25,  1S90.  In  that 
time  5,000  cubic  yards  of  concrete  had  been  handled,  and  about 
19,000  cubic  feet  of  granite  masonry  had  been  set.  This  time 
includes,  of  course,  all  the  stormy  weather,  during  which  we  were 
unable  to  reach  the  crib,  that  is,  during  this  period  of  64  days  we 
actually  worked  only  40  days.  The  granite  masonry  was  but  a  fac- 
ing on  the  outer  and  inner  circles,  the  center  being  filled  with  con- 
crete.    The  masonry  as  completed  reached  16  feet  above  the  water, 


THE  TECHNOGRAPH.  21 

but  is  to  be  carried  higher  after  the  completion  of  the  tunnel.  The 
stones  in  the  outer  circle  were  bound  together  by  copper  clamps  2 
inches  by  20  inches,  weighing  50  pounds  each. 

The  concrete  and  masonry  being  finished  the  derricks  were  run 
to  one  side  over  the  outer  wall,  and  were  used  as  a  hoist  during  the 
sinking  of  the  inlet  shaft.  The  two  lower  sections  of  the  shaft  had 
been  put  in  place  before  the  crib  was  launched,  and  hence  required 
only  to  be  cut  loose  in  order  to  begin  the  sinking.  This  was  accom- 
plished with  little  difficulty,  and  we  found  that  there  was  little  or  no 
leakage  through  the  3-inch  space  between  the  shaft  and  the  bottom 
of  the  crib,  the  water  having  been  shut  off  by  the  settlement  of  the 
crib.  Heavy  timber  guides  were  placed  about  the  shaft,  thus  secur- 
ing its  sinking  in  a  plumb  position. 

The  shaft  consisted  of  thirteen  sections  of  a  cast-iron  cylinder 
10  feet  internal  diameter  and  8  feet  high,  bolted  together  by  internal 
flanges.  The  cast-iron  shaft  was  underpinned  at  a  depth  of  92  feet 
below  datum  by  a  12-inch  brick  shaft  to  a  sump,  making  the  total 
height  or  depth  n  1  feet  4  inches  to  top,  and  standing  n  feet  4 
inches  above  city  dature  (about  water's  edge). 

The  material  excavated  was  mostly  loam  and  clay,  no  pump 
being  required  in  the  shaft,  although  we  stopped  12  inches  above  a 
water-bearing  strata.  In  fact,  water  was  thrown  down  the  shaft  to 
wet  the  miners'  spades.  About  160  tons  of  pig-iron  was  piled  upon 
the  shaft  to  force  it  to  the  required  depth,  this  being  nearly  160 
pounds  per  square  foot  of  shaft  in  the  ground. 

The  inlet  gates  were  placed  in  the  third  section  from  the  top, 
and  are  entirely  submerged;  they  are  operated  from  the  top  by 
means  of  screws.  These  gates  would  entirely  shut  off  the  water 
from  the  city,  should  the  tunnels  ever  need  repairs.  All  sliding 
parts  of  the  gates  are  faced  with  brass  in  order  to  avoid  rust. 

I  have  mentioned  no  losses  as  being  sustained  by  the  Fitz- 
Simons  &  Connell  Co.,  during  this  construction  on  account  of  storms, 
but  they  were  not  a  few.  We  consider  ourselves  extremely  fortu- 
nate in  being  able  to  say  that  only  one  life  was  lost  during  the  con- 
tinuance of  the  work,  and  that  by  drowning.  Although  the  top  of 
the  structure  is  16  feet  above  the  water,  on  several  occasions  have 
the  waves  gone  clear  over  this  wall,  throwing  solid  water  into  the 
inner  well. 

At  the  present  date  the  8-foot  tunnel  has  progressed  about  300 
feet  from  the  four-mile  crib  shaft  in  shore  (under  another  contractor) 
and  is  making  good  progress  daily. 


THE  '!'/:<  HNOGR  IPH. 

NOTES   FROM   MECHANICAL  ENGINEERING  THESES. 

Tiik  Heating   Power  oi    Illinois  Coal. 

In  the  accompanying  table  is  given  a  summary  of  the  results 
of  analyses  and  tests  of  samples  of  Illinois  coal  made  by  Messrs. 
R.  B.  McConney,  '89  (A),  and  F.  H.  Clark,  *9o  (B),  together  with 
the  results  obtained  from  samples  of  Youghiogheny  coal  which  are 
inserted  for  comparison.  The  samples  were,  in  nearly  all  cases, 
taken  from  the  cars  as  received  in  Champaign,  the  object  being  to 
obtain  a  fair  average  sample  of  the  commercial  coal  in  every 
instance.  The  percentage  of  moisture,  volatile  matter,  fixed  carbon, 
and  ash  were  determined  by  the  usual  laboratory  methods.  The 
heating  power  was  determined  by  burning  samples  of  the  coal  in  a 
water  calorimeter  of  the  form  described  in  the  American  Engineer 
for  June  12,  1889.  In  this  method  2  grams  of  pulverized  coal  are 
mixed  with  say  7.5  grams  of  potassium  chlorate  (KC10S)  and 
2.5  grams  of  potassium  nitrate  (KN03).  The  mixture  is  placed 
in  a  deep  crucible,  a  fuse  is  inserted  and  lighted,  and  the  crucible  is 
then  covered  with  a  cylindrical  cup  which  is  perforated  near  its 
edge  with  many  small  holes.  The  crucible  and  inverted  cup  are 
then  placed  in  a  known  weight  of  water  at  a  known  temperature. 
The  gases  of  combustion  given  off  escape  through  the  small  holes 
and  thence  through  the  surrounding  water,  the  temperature  of 
which  is  therefore  raised.  This  rise  of  temperature  is  the  basis  of 
the  calculation  of  the  heating  power.  In  Mr.  McConney's  tests 
the  proportions  of  coal,  potassium  chlorate,  and  potassium  nitrate 
used  were  as  already  given.  Mr.  Clark  found  by  a  special  series  of 
tests  that  the  highest  results  were  obtained  with  the  proportions  2 
grams  coal;  13.5  grams  KC10:!;  4.5  grams  KN08,  and  these 
proportions  were  used  in  his  experiments.  In  both  sets  of  tests 
the  method  followed  was  to  burn  three  charges  from  the  same 
sample;  if  the  results  agreed,  the  value  so  found  was  taken  to  be 
the  heating  power;  if  they  did  not  agree,  two  more  charges  were 
burned  and  the  average  of  all  was  taken  in  Mr.  Clark's  test  as  the 
heating  power;  but  in  Mr.  McConney's  tests,  the  results  given  are 
the  mean  between  the  value  most  frequently  found  in  five  tests  and 
the  maximum  value.  The  average  difference  between  the  highest 
and  lowest  values  for  any  one  sample  in  Mr.  Clark's  tests  is  from  .5 
to  .6  of  one  per  cent  of  the  tabulated  values. 


THE  TECHNOGRAPH. 


23 


Heating  Power  of  Illinois  Coal. 


Location  of  Mine. 


LaSalle,  LaSalle  county   

Peru,  "  "      

Bloomington,  McLean  county. 
Oakwood,  Vermillion  county  . . 
Fairmount,         "  "      .  . 

Danville,  "  "      .. 


Lincoln,  Logan  county . 


Mt.  Pulaski,  Logan   county . 
Niantic,  Macon  county 


Riverton,   Sangamon  county. 


Barclay,  "  " 

Pana,  Christian  county 

Assumption,  Christian  county. 
Mt.  Olive,  Macoupin  county  . . 


Odin,  Marion  county . 


Kinmundy,    Marion  county. 
Sandoval,  "  " 

Centralia,  "  " 

DuQuoin,    Perry  county.  . . . 


Big  Muddy,  Franklin  county. 
Carbondale,  Jackson  county.  . 
Youghiogheny,   Pennsylvania. 


.A. 
.A. 
.A. 
B.. 
,B.. 


..A. 

..A. 
..A. 
..B. 
..A. 
..A. 
..B. 
..A. 


.A. 
.A. 
.B. 
.A. 
.B. 
.A. 
.B. 
.B. 
.A. 
.A. 
A. 
.B. 
.B. 
.B. 
.A. 
.B 


■      "3- 
,  0    1 


a"  tj 


£  < 

-  o 


12,169  39 
11,82937 

11. 31335 
12,528  37 

11*431  31 
12,285132 
12,50643 

n.65537 


11,272 
11,718 
11,360 
11,529 
11,529 

".633135 
12,096  38 
",205135 
11,61036 
13,06841 
",44135 
".772  35 
",954  33 
12,663  4i 
11,66434 

11.959  35 
11,78138 
12,17032 
12,393  30 
12,825  32 
12,58233 
13,940  33 
14.25635 


4  43 
19  47 
99  45 
55  46 
8  47 
35  53 
70  45 
0746 

9944 
3  49 
8246 

25  47 
15  45 
39  48 
45  44 
6746 
37  46 

2  50 
43  44 

0  51 
995o 

1  I46 

o  !47 
0750 

1S45 

03  53 
35J54 
1556 
65  57 
1360 
"  '58 


95  » 
2  6 
20  14 
o  8 
05  13 
o  3 
37  6 
43  i° 
50  12 

5  H 

53  9 

4  s 

45 

3 

25, 

95 

1 

49  11 

5  8 
9 
6 


43  8 

61  9 

71  4 

65  7 

05  8 

65  11 

15  4 


78  6 
15  11 


69I  7 

08  8 

0  4 

5  4 

82  4 

1  '  5 


•7t 
.46 
8 
.  11 

■* 

.08 

.1 

•55 
88 
.04 
•44 

•9 

.0 
.6 

65 
•  4 


38 
I 

37 
22 

9 

"7 
3 
6  07 


5  9 
7.0 

7.19 
8.28 
6.84 
6.67 
785 
4.25 
1 .40 
7 


Tests  of  a  Smoke-Preventing  Furnace. 

During  the  winter  of  1889-90  tests  were  made  by  Messrs.  Mc- 
Kee  and  Gilliland  ('90),  of  a  steam  jet  smoke-preventing  device  as 
applied  to  two  of  the  steam  heating  boilers  at  the  University  of 
Illinois.  These  boilers  are  of  the  Root  type,  each  consisting  of  100 
4-inch  tubes  9  feet  long,  and  having  22.5  square  feet  of  grate  sur- 
face, and  are  used  wholly  for  steam  heating.  The  returns  from  the 
radiators  and  coils  are  connected  to  traps  and  thence  to  a  tank 
from  which  the  water  is  fed  to  the  boilers  by  a  steam  pump.  This 
pump  is  supplied  with  steam  from  a  small  vertical  tubular  boiler 
which  also  supplied  steam  to  the  jets  of  the  smoke  preventer  at  a 
gauge  pressure  at  the  boiler  of  from  35  to  40  pounds. 

The  arrangement  for  preventing  smoke  is  as  follows:  Along 
each  side  of  the  furnace  about  9  inches  above  the  grate  is  a  row  of 


THE  TECHXOGEAPH. 

openings  about  ^-inch  in  diameter  and  about  6}4  inches  from  cen- 
ter to  center.  Each  is  formed  by  a  cast-iron  tube  set  in  the  brick 
work  which  may  be  compared  to  the  outer  tube  of  a  Bunsen 
burner.  Air  is  supplied  to  what  corresponds  to  the  side  openings 
in  a  I.unsen  burner  from  the  ash  pit  by  passages  left  in  the  brick 
work,  one  passage  supplying  two  tubes.  At  the  back  end  of  each 
tube  is  a  steam  jet  of  which  the  opening  is  about  one-sixteenth 
inch  in  diameter,  corresponding  in  position  to  the  gas  jet  in  a  Bun- 
sen  burner,  which  is  supplied  with  steam  by  means  of  a  ?4  inch 
steam  pipe  set  in  the  brick  work  and  connected  to  the  small  boiler 
previously  mentioned.  This  pipe  is  doubled  back  and  forth  in  the 
bridge  wall,  the  object  being  to  superheat  the  steam  on  its  way  to 
the  jets. 

Five  pairs  of  tests  were  made  in  all,  three  with  both  main  boil- 
ers in  use,  and  two  with  single  boilers.  For  each  pair  of  tests,  i.  e., 
one  with  jets  in  use  and  one  without  jets,  the  times  were  selected 
when  the  conditions  were  as  nearly  identical  as  possible.  In  all  of 
the  tests  the  evaporation  in  the  main  boilers  was  found  to  be 
slightly  greater  with  the  jets  than  without  them,  the  average  evap- 
oration being  increased  from  5.16  pounds  of  water  from  and  at 
2120  per  pound  of  coal  to  5.31,  or  about  2.9  per  cent.  But  more 
coal  was  required  for  the  small  boiler  when  the  jets  were  in  use,  so 
that  taking  the  plant  as  a  whole  the  efficiency  with  the  jets  in 
operation  was  found  to  be  about  99  per  cent,  of  that  without  the 
jets.  After  making  allowance  for  the  loss  by  radiation  from  the 
small  boiler  and  for  the  steam  used  by  the  pump,  both  being  deter- 
mined by  tests  and  calculation,  it  was  found  that  23.2  pounds  of 
coal  per  hour  were  required  to  furnish  steam  to  the  jets. 

As  a  smoke  preventer  the  arrangement  is  fairly  successful. 
The  steam  supply  to  the  jets  for  each  boiler  is  controlled  by  i 
inch  globe  valve.  When  these  valves  are  opened  about  two  turns, 
the  smoke  issuing  from  the  chimney  is  reduced  to  a  light  cloud 
excepting  at  the  time  when  the  furnace  doors  are  opened  for  firing. 
The  rate  of  combustion  is  ordinarily  about  13.5  pounds  of  coal  per 
square  foot  of  grate  per  hour. 


THE  TECHNOGRAPH.  25 

A  CLOCK  FOR  EVERYBODY. 

Pbof.  Ira  O.  Baker. 

Probably  but  few,  if  any,  persons  living  to-day  appreciate  the 
inconvenience  in  matters  involving  the  time  of  the  day  which  existed 
before  the  invention,  or  even  the  wide  distribution,  of  clocks  and 
watches.  In  all  countries  until  a  comparatively  late  date,  and  in 
some  even  now,  the  diurnal  revolution  of  the  heavens,  the  rising, 
culmination,  and  setting  of  the  sun  and  stars  were  the  only  means 
of  telling  the  time  of  day.  Owing  to  the  cheapness  of  watches  and 
clocks,  and  in  no  country  are  they  as  cheap  or  as  good  as  in  our 
own,  the  ability  to  tell  time  by  the  sun  or  stars  is  liable  to  become  a 
lost  art,  if  it  is  not  already  lost. 

One  object  of  this  article  is  to  offer  a  few  hints  on  the  deter- 
mination of  time  by  simple  observations  of  the  heavens;  and  it  will 
not  have  been  written  in  vain  if  it  shall  incite  even  a  few  to  observe 
the  revolution  of  the  heavens  and  contemplate  the  grandeur  of  the 
movements. 

THE    DAY    CLOCK. 

"The  sun  to  rule  by  day."  Remember,  i,  That  the  meredian  is 
a  circle  passing  through  the  north  point,  the  zenith,  and  the  south 
point;  2,  That  the  pole  is  on  this  meridian  at  an  angle  above  the 
north  horizon  equal  to  the  latitude  of  the  observer  (for  a  majority 
of  the  readers  of  this  it  is  a  little  less  than  half  way  up  from  the 
north);  3,  That  the  equator  of  the  heavens  is  90  degrees  from  the 
pole,  i.  e.,  the  equator  passes  through  the  east  and  west  points  and 
crosses  the  meridian  at  an  angular  distance  south  of  the  zenith  equal 
to  the  latitude — a  little  more  than  half  way  up  from  the  south. 

When  the  sun  is  on  the  meridian  it  is  12  o'clock,  noon.  Imagine 
a  line  drawn  from  the  east  point  of  the  horizon  to  the  north  pole, 
then  when  the  sun  is  on  this  line  it  is  6  a.  m.  The  straight  edge  of 
a  card  or  pencil  held  very  close  to  the  eye  will  be  of  great  assist- 
ance in  tracing  this  line  through  the  sky.  Notice  that  in  the  sum- 
mer the  sun  crosses  this  line  long  after  sunrise,  while  in  the  winter 
it  crosses  the  line  before  sunrise.  Similarly  a  line  drawn  from  the 
west  point  to  the  north  pole  is  the  6  p.  m.  line.  If  the  sun  is  half 
way  between  the  6  a.  m.  line  and  the  meridian,  it  is  9  o'clock;  if 
one-third  of  the  way,  8  o'clock,  etc.,  etc. 

To  those  who  have  not  tried  it,  this  will  seem  like  a  rough  way 
of  determining  the  time,  but  it  is  astonishing  how  great  accuracy 
can  be  attained  by  a  little  practice,  particularly  when  the  sun  is  near 


26  THE  TECHNOGRAPH. 

either  6  o'clock  line.  Experience  seems  to  show  that  with  a  little 
practice  any  bright  boy  of  fifteen  can  determine  time  by  this  method 
within  fifteen  minutes.  The  method  is  specially  applicable  in  local- 
ities where  the  cardinal  points  are  accurately  marked  as,  for  instance, 
in  the  West  where  the  roads,  fences,  etc.,  run  north  and  south,  and 
east  and  west. 

The  time  determined  as  above  is  apparent  solar  time,  and  dif- 
fers from  the  time  kept  by  a  good  clock.  In  the  words  of  the  house- 
hold almanac,  "the  sun  is  fast"  or  "the  sun  is  slow;"  that  is,  time 
determined  by  the  sun  will  be  faster  or  slower  than  the  true  time 
according  as  the  sun  is  "fast"'  or  "slow."  The  common  almanacs 
usually  contain  a  column  which  shows  for  each  day  of  the  year  how 
much  the  sun  is  fast  or  slow.  An  examination  will  show  that  about 
the  first  of  November  the  sun  time  is  16  minutes  too  fast,  and  that 
the  difference  grows  less  for  nearly  two  months  either  way  from 
that  date,  when  there  is  practically  no  difference  between  the  two 
kinds  of  time.  About  the  middle  of  February  sun  time  is  14  min- 
utes too  slow,  and  the  difference  decreases  each  way  from  that  date 
for  about  a  month  and  a  half,  when  the  two  practically  agree  again. 
For  any  other  time  of  the  year,  the  difference  is  inappreciable. 
Notice  that  sun  time  never  differs  more  than  about  15  minutes  from 
the  local  time. 

The  time  found  and  corrected  as  above  is  local  time,  and  will 
differ  from  railroad  time,  which  most  clocks  now  keep,  according  as 
the  observer  is  east  or  west  of  the  meridian  from  which  the  railroads 
count  their  time.  It  is  not  necessary  here  to  explain  the  method  of 
making  this  correction. 

THi;    NIGHT    CLOCK. 

"And  the  stars  to  rule  by  night."  The  ancients  seem  to  have 
determined  the  time  during  the  night  by  the  rising,  culmination,  and 
setting  of  the  various  constellations.  Euripides,  who  lived  480-407 
B.  C,  makes  the  chorus  in  one  of  his  plays  ask  the  time  in  this  form: 

"What  is  the  star  now  passing?" 

And  the  answer  is: 

"The  Pleiades  show  themselves  in  the  East; 
The  eagle  soars  in  the  summit  of  heaven.'' 

It  must  have  required  a  prodigious  memory  to  keep  in  mind  the 
times  of  rising  of  the  various  constellations,  particularly  as  they 
change  from  day  to  day. 

It  is  not  known  that  the  method  described  below  was  used  by 
the  ancients,  but  it  is  probable  that  this  and  many  somewhat  similar 


THE  TECHNO'; RA  J '//. 


27 


devices  were  employed  to  tell  the  time.  It  would  almost  seem  that 
the  Creator,  in  his  sympathy  for  those  who  are  poor  in  the  things  of 
this  world,  has  provided  them  with  a  clock  of  unapproachable  mag- 
nitude, the  dial  plate  of  which  is  studded  with  jewels,  and  hung  high 
in  the  northern  heavens,  where  it  has  continued  to  mark  off  the 
hours  with  unerring  certainty  since  the  beginning  of  time  itself.  The 
Great  Dipper,  whose  nightly  revolutions  about  the  pole  has  been 
observed  by  all,  is  the  great  night  clock.  An  examination  of  the 
accompanying  diagram  will  show  how  it  marks  off  the  hours. 

5 


Tothtffat  P«*t*r- 


At  this  time  of  the  year  (spring),  the  great  dipper  is  to  be  found 
early  in  the  evening  high  in  the  northeast;  it  moves  west  as  the 
hours  go  by.  The  diagram  represents  this  constellation  when  at  its 
highest  point.     The  dipper  is  composed  of  seven  bright  stars;    the 


THE  TECHNOGBAPH. 

two  marked  i  and  2  in  the  diagram  are  called  the  pointers,  since 
they  point  nearly  toward  the  north  star.  The  stars  of  the  dipper 
correspond  to  the  figures  on  the  clock  face.  In  an  ordinary  clock 
the  figures  are  fixed  and  the  hands  are  movable;  but  in  our  great 
star  clock  the  figures  (stars)  are  movable,  and  the  hand  (the  meri- 
dian) is  stationary.  The  heavy  lines  shown  in  the  diagram  are  one 
hour  apart.  Then,  if  the  pointers  are  on  the  meridian,  an  hour 
thereafter  afterwards,  a  point  half-way  between  stars  3  and  4,  will  be 
on  the  meridian.  The  dotted  lines  indicate  the  half  hours.  Notice 
the  method  of  numbering  these  lines.  A  little  study  will  be  required 
to  fix  in  mind  the  positions  of  the  several  lines.  Notice  that  there 
are  two  stars  in  each  hour  space.  The  +  2  line  is  as  far  beyond 
7  as  7  is  from  6.  Notice  that  if  lines  were  drawn  through  stars  4,  5, 
6,  and  7,  they  would  indicate  quarter  hours,  nearly. 

On  the  21st  of  March,  when  the  line  marked  o  coincides  with 
the  meridian,  i.  e.,  when  the  line  o  points  from  the  zenith  to  the 
north  point  of  the  horizon,  it  is  12  o'clock  midnight.  This  is  the 
time  at  which  the  diagram  is  set.  When  the  line  +  1  comes  into 
the  meridian,  it  is  1  o'clock;  when  +  2  is  in  the  meridian,  it  is  2 
o'clock;  and  when  — 1  is  in  the  meridian  it  is  11  o'clock,  etc.  If  the 
dotted  line  between  stars  4  and  5  coincides  with  the  meridian,  it  is 
half  past  12  o'clock,  etc. 

When  the  line  +  2  has  passed  by  the  meridian,  the  time  can  still 
be  estimated  by  imagining  a  line  4-3  to  be  placed  as  far  to  the  right 
of  +2  as  +1  is  to  the  left;  but  before  line  +2  has  passed  very  far 
by  the  meridian,  the  line  — 1  or  the  imaginary  one  — 2  will  have 
come  into  the  6  o'clock  line  on  the  west.  If  the  line  — 1  coincides 
with  the  west  6  o'clock  line,  it  is  5  a.  m.  Similarly,  if  the  +2  line 
coincides  with  the  6  o'clock  line  on  the  east,  it  is  S  o'clock  p.  m. 
Thus  between  the  two  6  o'clock  lines  and  the  meridians,  it  is  possible 
to  determine  the  time  at  almost  any  hour  of  the  night.  In  the  spring 
and  summer,  the  6  o'clock  lines  and  the  meridian  above  the  pole 
will  be  used;  and  in  the  fall  and  winter,  the  6  o'clock  lines  and  the 
meridian  below  the  pole  must  be  employed. 

Our  great  north  clock  is  a  sidereal  clock;  it  keeps  star  time,  of 
which  366  ! ;  days  make  a  year.    As  compared  with  common  clocks, 

us  a  day  in  a  year;  hence,  it  gains  nearly  four  minutes  in  a 
day,  or,  to  be  a  little  more  accurate,  it  gains  each  day  four  minutes 
lacking  four,  seconds,  /.  <■.,  3  min.  56  sec.  The  two  kinds  of  time 
agree  on  the  21st  of  March,  but  for  any  other  time  of  the  year  the 
star  clock   is  too  fast.     Suppose  that  on  the   21st  of  April  it  is  12 


THE  TECHXOGRAPH.  2£ 

o'clock  midnight  by  the  north  clock,  what  is  the  true  time?  The 
21st  of  April  is  30  days  after  the  21st  of  March,  and  hence  the  star 
clock  has  gained  30  times  4  minutes,  which  equals  2  hours,  or  more 
exactly  the  gain  is  2  hours  lacking  2  minutes;  therefore,  on  the  given 
date,  12  o'clock  by  the  north  clock  corresponds  to  2  minutes  before 
10  o'clock  p.  m. 

The  computation  necessary  to  correct  the  north  clock  is  greatly 
simplified  by  noticing  that  the  gain  in  3  months  is  6  hours.  For 
example,  if  on  the  21st  of  June  the  north  clock  indicates  12  mid- 
night, we  know  immediately  that  the  clock  is  6  hours  fast,  and  that 
therefore  the  true  time  is  6  p.  m.  If  on  the  21st  of  July  the  north 
clock  indicates  6  a.  m.,  we  find  the  true  time  by  remembering  that 
the  star  clock  was  six  hours  fast  on  the  21st  of  June,  and  that  it  has 
gained  2  hours  since,  and  hence  is  8  hours  fast;  therefore  the  true 
time  is  10  p.  m.  Similarly  for  other  times  of  the  year.  With  a  little 
practice  these  explanations  are  readily  comprehended  and  easily 
remembered.  It  is  astonishing  what  degree  of  accuracy  can  be  at- 
tained by  a  little  practice. 

To  those  studying  astronomy,  the  north  clock  affords  a  simple 
and  easy  method  of  determining  the  right  ascension  of  any  particu- 
lar star,  and  is,  therefore,  a  great  help  in  finding  the  objects  de- 
scribed by  the  text-books.  In  times  past,  the  writer's  students  in 
descriptive  astronomy  reported  that  this  device  was  very  useful  to 
them  for  this  purpose. 


CURBS  AND  GUTTERS. 
F.  R.  Williamson,  '92. 

The  thickness  and  depth  of  curbs,  and  the  form  and  size  of 
gutters  can  not  be  computed  from  theoretical  considerations,  but 
must  be  determined  by  a  careful  study  of  practice.  In  this  article 
will  be  briefly  given  some  results  of  practice. 

Curbs. 

The  minimum  height  above  the  gutter  may  be  put  at  3  inches, 

while  the  maximum  will  depend  upon  the  height  of  the  sidewalk 

above  the  gutter.     The  depth  below  the  upper  surface  of  the  gutter 

varies  in  practice  from  10  to  15  inches,  but  with  a  concrete  founda- 


THE  TECHNOGRAPH. 


tion  it  may  be  less.  In  the  ordinary  form  of  curb,  the  thickness 
ranges  from  3  to  6  inches,  and  the  lengths  most  commonly  used 
range  from  2  to  6  feet.  For  foundation,  sand  and  gravel  are  largely 
used.  Concrete  is  now  rapidly  gaining  favor,  as  it  permits  a  curb 
of  much  less  depth,  and  at  the  same  time  makes  a  firmer  base. 
The  curb  is  sometimes  set  vertically  but  more  generally  it  is  given  a 
slight  batter,  in  which  case  the  top  is  usually  dressed  horizontal 
and  flush  with  the  sidewalk. 

Gutters 

On  many  streets  no  special  form  of  gutter  is  used  other  than 
that  formed  by  the  curb  and  the  crown  of  the  street,  while  on 
equally  as  many  others  some  form  of  gutter  is  provided.  In  the 
latter  case  the  surface  of  the  gutter  may  be  either  flat  or  slightly 
concave.  The  gutters  are  generally  constructed  of  the  same  mate- 
rial as  the  street  pavement,  but  in  the  case  of  cobble  stone  pave- 
ments a  flat  stone  1  foot  or  more  wide  is  placed  in  the  middle  of 
the  gutter. 

Examples. 

In  the  report  for  1889  of  the  Engineering  Department  of 
Washington,  D.  C,  are  given  the  following  specifications.  For 
Standard  Granite  Curb:  Length  to  be  not  less  than  6  feet,  depth 
not  less  than  20  inches  nor  more  than  24  inches,  thickness  6  inches, 
base  must  average  not  less  than  6  inches  in  width.     The  curb  must 

•*-««  SLOPE  M, 


/'  6 


Fig.  i.     Granite  Curb. — Washington,  D.  C. 

be  dressed  ta   inches  on  the  face,  3   inches  on  the  back,  6  inches 
deep  at   the  joints,  and  the  top  beveled  '4  inch.     For  Blue   Stone 


WILLIAMSON— CURBS  AND  GUTTERS. 


31 


Curb:  The  specifications  are  the  same  as  above  except  that  the 
length  must  not  be  less  than  4  feet,  nor  the  thickness  less  than  5 
inches.  For  Special  Granite  Curb  (Fig.  1):  Length  not  less  than 
6  feet,  thickness  8  inches,  depth  not  less  than  8  inches  nor  more 
than  10  inches,  dressed  on  top  the  full  depth  of  the  face,  and  3 
inches  on  the  back,  and  the  top  beveled  ^  inch. 

In  the  very  valuable  series  of  papers  on  Municipal  Engineer- 
ing in  Engineering  News,  Vol.  17,  the  standard  curb  and  gutter  of 
Philadelphia  is  described.     See  Fig.  2. 


\i}SNASHEp    PA V/NGt  SAND ■; •>'//, 


Fig.  2.     Curb  and  Guttkr. — Philadelphia. 

The  thickness  of  the  curb  is  5  inches,  depth  20  inches,  and 
length  6  feet.  The  gutter  is  5  inches  deep,  except  at  inlets  where  it 
varies  from  7  to  10  inches.  The  bottom  of  the  gutter  consists  of  a 
flat  stone  about  10  inches  wide,  and  3  to  5  feet  long,  laid  5  to  8 
inches  below  the  top  of  the  curb. 

In  Cincinnati,  Ohio,  one  of  the  standard  forms  of  curbs  is  4  to 
5  inches  thick,  not  less  than  21  inches  deep,  and  3  feet  long; 
dressed  10  inches  on  the  ends,  12  inches  on  the  face,  and  3  inches 
on  the  back;  set  on  2  inches  of  packed  sand  and  gravel,  with  a 
batter  of  1^  inches,  forming  a  right  angle  with  the  gutter  flag. 
Stones  are  placed  back  of  the  bottom  of  each  curb  to  help  counter- 
act the  pressure  of  the  sidewalk.  The  gutter  flags  are  not  less  than 
3  feet  long,  about  6  inches  thick,  and  16  inches  wide;  are  cut  on 
the  side  next  to  the  curb,  the  top  hammer  dressed,  the  ends  dressed 
and  squared  to  make  y(  inch  joints  3  inches  deep;  and  are  set 
upon  a  6-inch  bed  of  gravel.  The  ordinary  depth  of  gutter  is  7 
inches. 

Through  the  courtesy  of  William  T.  Rossell,  Captain  of  Engi- 
neers, U.  S.  A.,  I  am  enabled  to  give  a  brief  description  of  the  com- 
bination curb  and  gutter  used  in  Washington,  D.  C. 

Fig.  3  shows  the  general  section,  and  Fig.  4  shows  a  horizontal 
view  and  a  vertical  section  at  hand-hole. 


THE   TECHNOGRAPH. 


WALK 


ROADWAY 


X'      8" 


3.      Combination  Curb 'and  Gutter. — Washington,  D.  C. 


coaichi  li     BASt      6"  THICK 

•-      it  r 


Fig.  4.      Hand  hole   in  Combination  Curt,  and  Gutter.- 
w  vshing  ton,  d.  c. 


MATHER— SINK-HOLE.  33 

The  dimensions  and  general  plan  are  as  shown  in  the  cuts. 
The  combined  curb  and  gutter  consists  of  concrete  composed  of 
one  part  Portland  cement,  two  parts  clean  sharp  sand,  and  three 
parts  clean  stone  broken  to  pass  a  i-inch  ring.  The  exposed  sur- 
faces of  both  gutter  and  curb  are  coated  i^  inches  thick  with  a 
mortar  composed  of  three  parts  granulated  granite  and  two  parts 
cement.  The  curb  and  gutter  are  sawed,  at  intervals  of  8  or  10 
feet,  to  allow  for  expansion  and  contraction  and  to  give  the  appear- 
ance of  cut  stone.  A  conduit,  4  by  4  inches,  for  electrical  conduct- 
ors is  left  at  the  base  of  the  curb  if  so  ordered  by  the  Engineer 
Commissioner.  Hand-holes,  to  give  access  to  this  conduit,  are  left 
at  intervals  of  about  50  feet. 


A  REMARKABLE  SINK-HOLE. 
L!y  R.  A.  Mather,  '92. 

Sixteen  miles  west  of  Chicago  on  the  Chicago,  Burlington  & 
Quincy  Railway,  there  is  a  remarkable  sink-hole.  As  the  east- 
bound  train  passes  from  a  20-feet  cut,  a  passenger  may  observe  a 
small  flat,  some  15  or  16  feet  below  grade,  1,000  feet  across  and 
extending  half  a  mile  on  either  side  the  track.  This  flat  is  grown 
over  with  slough  grass  and  cats'-tails,  and  is  partly  covered  with 
water.  When  the  grading  for  the  first  two  tracks  was  done  several 
years  ago,  trouble  was  caused  by  the  sinking  of  the  embankment. 
Piles  were  driven  but  to  no  avail.  The  roadbed  was  completed  by 
filling  in  until  the  embankment  stopped  sinking. 

Last  summer  when  the  embankment  was  being  widened  for  a 
third  track,  it  again  began  to  sink,  sometimes  from  1  to  3  feet  in  a 
night  and  sinking  altogether  40  feet.  For  two  months  a  large 
construction  gang  worked  steadily  on  the  fill  without  gaining  a  foot. 
The  earth  under  the  embankment,  instead  of  becoming  more  com- 
pact was  pressed  out  and  up,  actually  moving  the  telegraph  poles 
12  feet  farther  from  the  track  and  raising  a  ridge  10  feet  high.  As 
there  is  an  end  to  all  things,  equilibrium  was  finally  established  and 
the  track  brought  to  grade. 

About  95,000  cubic  yards  of  gravel  and  dirt  were  required  to 
fill  the  sink.  The  cost  of  labor  and  material  for  the  1,000  feet  of 
embankment,  including  the  new  roadbed  and  the  fill  on  the  old  one, 
was  $10,000,  or  $10  a  linear  foot,  about  seven-tenths  of  which  was. 


THE  TECHNOGRAPH. 

owing  to  the  sink-hole.  Trains  had  to  slow  up  to  4  miles  an  hour, 
which  added  much  to  the  expense,  particularly  as  some  days  more 
than  a  hundred  trains  passed  over  the  road. 

No  borings  were  made  to  determine  the  strata,  which  perhaps 
was  not  wise,  since  a  complete  knowledge  of  the  ground  might  have 
led  to  a  plan  which  would  have  saved  considerable  expense. 

The  flat  is  underlaid  by  a  stratum  of  Niagara  limestone.  Al- 
though underground  caves  are  often  found  in  strata  of  rock,  yet 
this  can  not  explain  the  sinking,  for  the  roadbed  would  have  sunk 
rapidly  rather  than  gradually,  had  the  dome  of  a  cave  which  sup- 
ported it  suddenly  given  away.  Besides,  this  would  not  explain 
why  the  earth  was  displaced  along  the  sides  of  the  embankment. 
Apparently  the  roadbed  rests  upon  either  a  bed  of  quicksand  or  a 
bed  of  clay  saturated  with  water.  Either  material,  with  bed-rock 
under  it  and  a  tough  crust  of  earth  over  it,  would  have  a  tendency 
to  transmit  pressure  to  all  confining  surfaces.  When  a  load  great 
enough  to  exceed  its  ultimate  strength  was  put  upon  the  crust,  it 
gave  way  thus  transmitting  the  pressure  to  the  quicksand  or  satu- 
rated clay  below.  The  sand  or  clay  in  turn  tiansmitted  the  force 
of  the  load,  as  upward  pressure,  against  the  under  side  of  the  sur- 
rounding crust.  As  the  load  of  the  embankment  was  increased,  the 
upward  pressure  against  the  crust  increased  until  finally  the  surface 
in  the  neighborhood  of  the  telegraph  poles  was  raised  into  a  ridge. 
The  quicksand  or  saturated  clay  followed  the  displacement  of  the 
crust,  while  the  embankment  followed  the  displacement  of  the 
quicksand  or  clay.  As  more  dirt  was  added  to  fill  the  sink,  the 
load  was  increased,  at  last  producing  such  a  strain  on  the  ridge 
that  it  cracked  open,  leaving  a  gap  2  or  3  feet  wide. 


ROPE  DRIVING. 
By  F.  L.  Bunton,  '91. 

The  transmission  of  power  by  rope,  cotton,  hemp,  rawhide,  or 
manilla  is  fast  taking  the  place  of  gearing  and  leather  belting  for 
large  powers,  and  where  the  distance  between  the  power  and  the 
work  is  comparatively  great. 

Cotton  rope  is  the  most  generally  used  in  England,  where  it  is 
said  to  be  the  best,  but  as  a  greater  part  of  the  applications  are  in 
cotton  factories  its  extensive  use  is  readily  understood.     Hemp, 


BUNTON—ROPE  DRIVING.  35 

rawhide  and  manilla  are  used  extensively  in  the  United  States.  The 
average  duration  of  manilla  rope  is  about  six  months.  Rawhide  is 
guaranteed  for  three  years.  One  drive  of  ten  coils  of  i^-inch 
manilla  rope  in  an  electric  plant  in  Chicago  was  used  twelve  months 
before  it  broke.  A  transmission  at  the  Rookery  Building,  Chicago, 
of  twenty  coils  of  ^3 -inch  rawhide  rope,  transmitting  225  H.  P.,  was 
used  two  years,  and  was  spliced  but  once  during  that  time. 

Cotton  is  more  extensible  than  the  others;  hemp  and  manilla 
are  about  the  same  in  regard  to  extensibility  and  flexibility,  while 
rawhide  does  not  form  to  the  pully  quite  so  readily  nor  stretch  so 
rapidly.  When  the  latter  becomes  set  to  the  pully  it  maintains  its 
original  cross-section  more  nearly  than  any  of  the  other  kinds. 
Care  should  be  taken  in  splicing,  long  splices  being  better  than  short, 
as  a  more  uniform  cross- section  is  given  to  the  rope  and  sudden  en- 
largements cause  abrupt  changes  in  velocity,  when  passing  over  the 
pulley.  The  Chicago  Link-Belt  Machinery  Co.  make  their  splices 
from  twelve  to  twenty- five  feet  in  length. 

Mr.  C.  W.  Hunt*  recommends  a  working-stress  of  3V  of  the 
breaking  strength,  while  the  Link-Belt  Machinery  Co.,  of  Chicago, 
use  3V  of  the  breaking  strength.  Mr.  W.  H.  Boothf  says  5,000  feet 
per  minute  is  the  best  speed,  and  Mr.  Hunt  advises  4,800  feet  per 
minute.  These  are  both  reasonable  speeds,  but  above  6,000  feet 
per  minute,  the  loss  by  centrifugal  action  is  much  increased. 

In  order  to  show  how  difficult  it  is  to  slip  the  rope  in  the 
groove,  the  Chicago  Link-Belt  Machinery  Co.  attached  a  50-lb. 
weight  to  a  ^5 -inch  manilla  rope,  and  on  a  24-inch  pully  with  a  45- 
degree  angle  in  its  face,  a  weight  of  350  lbs.  at  the  other  end  was 
necessary  in  order  to  slip  the  rope  in  the  groove.  Let  T2  =  tension 
on  the  driving  side,  T1  =  tension  on  the  following  side,  Y  =  co-offi- 
cient  of  friction,  and  N  =  arc  of  contact  in  fraction  of  the  circum- 

T 
ference.   According  to  Unwin's  formula,  log.  r,,2  =  2.729  NY, whence 

rp  J  j 

log.  T2  =  log.  W  =  log.  7  =  .845098,  N  =  .5,  therefore  for  this  case 
the  co-efficient  of  friction  Y  =  .619.  Ropes  do  not  drive  pulleys 
by  adhesion  alone,  but  it  is  more  by  wedging  action  due  to  the  angle 
of  the  grooves. 

Rope  is  not  very  expensive,  and  compares  favorably  with  belt- 
ing and  gearing.     Its  noiseless  movement,  evenness  of  transmission, 


*  Transations  of  A.  S.  M.  E.,  i£ 
t  American  Machinist,  12-8-88. 


36  THE  TBCHNOGRAPH. 

and  exact  alignment  being  unnecessary,  place  it  far  in  advance  for 
long  transmissions. 

The  following  table  contains  data  taken  from  several  rope  trans- 
missions in  Chicago.  The  horse-power  in  the  table  is  that  which  the 
plant  was  transmitting  at  that  time.  The  values  Tt ,  T, ,  V,  are  solved 
by  Unwin's  formulas,  previously  given.  The  co-efficient  of  friction 
being  .731  in  every  case  and  45-degree  angles  in  all  of  the  grooves. 
The  first  ten  transmissions  are  run  by  manilla  rope,  the  next  five  by 
rawhide,  and  No.  16  by  cotton  rope. 


B  UNTON—ROPE  DRI T rIN( • . 


37 


CMJi  AW    N   »   00    00^4   0<-n  *W   N   m 


•3AUp  JO  *o^r 


•adoa  jo  sjiod  jo  -ox 


O  ^4  ^4  ^4  "<I  ^4  ^4    to    to    00  00  00  00^1  ^4 

OUiOtLnOiUiUit/iUiMsISvlLntn 


•3d0J   JO  JaiaUIBIQ 


8CJ      omK^o^^m-nnw  •psniuisinu}  iaA\od-as.ioH 

O   Qui  O*"*   M   OC<-n  O   O  nO    «■>  v^i  to   to 


•J33J  UI 

'saaiuao  uaaA\;aq  aouBisiQ 


MiOOJ   OC  ON-P-  Ui   C\  00<-n  00  Cn  O    C  ■£>  •*>• 


UI  JSAUp   JO  I3J3UIBIQ 


MW-A 


O0U\   to  ^4    10 


•333J 
Ut    I3A\0{J0J    JO    J3}3U1BIQ 


MM  >-c  to  >-    tO    to 

CN  00-^4   00W  »J  «-J  ^J   OW    CNt-n   00  O    O    O 
WvO^nVHAUiUtn   O    O    O^n^n   ON  O    O 


•g^nuira 
jad  J3Aup  jo  suoiitqoAa-Nj; 


-J<-nOOO<-ri  —   0    000-t*l-n  o<-n  <^i 


•ainuiui 
J3d  J3A\0^0J  jo  suoi;rqoAa'Nj_ 


«■•   OnnO    CnO  vju>Ln   CnW    Cnw  W   0^0> 
O    O    CN-P*  <-"   ON  O    OA^AAOO    CCN 


•Xajjnd 
jp3ras  .^oj    }ob}uod   jo   oiy 


C   O  ^4   0\W   0\  Ox  00  w   &O0O  WW   ""   i-1 

W    ON  OC  O    O    O  AOjWUvO    00  O  NO    o    to 

CN        UiA  O    to    O    O  <-"   CN^4   to 


•puooas  jad 
aaaj   ui   adoj   jo   XipopA. 


O    tO    tO         04  h    mO    M  ■->-■ 

Ul    wOJVO     h  _    ^_    _n   ^_     On-£*  W     N*    00  — 

U>  -^4  Oo    to    00  OCV^i   to  »-4   -LnOJvj    _    ONO 

O-  i-"  ■*>■   OnvO  -f^   CnnO  -f^    O   Cnoi   O^J  00" 

tO    00       NO         M   NOinjhsOWW 

<-"  00         O  ■*  -t»    O  <-n 


•sqj  ui  adoj  jad  aojqj  §ui 
-Aiap  aqi  =  <j_  =  ij,  —  2J> 


„    to    10    >-  W  _    _    <-)    N  "-■    N 

kj  •£•    On  O  <-"  o  On  oo^J  ~~»  *•  -f*    to    to    ii 

||0>puip*  &££  cX  00OJ  ONO\-„ 

0^  oo  ^4  cw  ^a  UA  q  o  o  ^i  cn  o  -^  - 


oa 


C> 


*sqi  ui  adoj  jad  apis  §ui 
-Aup  aq;  uo  uoisuajL  =  sj. 


^  _ (TT^-v^ £  *** w  -<=>•  OCONOO--4  to  to 

<-"   .      .      ?0\irf  Y1    »*  NO  C/J  <-n  <-n  O  vO    »"    0000 

o  o 


■adoj  jad  -sqj  ut   uiui 
jad  iaaj  ooo'i  }B   ij^  —  zj. 


ON  cn.  i-    to  -^  -    ON  On-4   "T  ,N    ""  "^  S?  ,  , 

~    OCUi  -P»    00O    ON  On  OCLn  <*>   00*.  vp  -~4   M 

O  d)   00  ON  N  '00U>  -<l   -  Cn  -£.  S^-fe.^0  Hi  ° 
AojOj    CNC(-n<-ntn   «    On^O    °^<-"   2    £ 


•adoj  aad  -sqj  ui 
ajnuiiu  jad  ;aaj  ooo'i  ;b  \l 


0<-"0    »"<-nO    O    0<-" 

^O^ONO^n 


MO 

to  to  o  O  w 

00  O   O   On  On 


5.  o  o  o  o  - 
o  o  o  oo 


•sq{  ui 
1H§!3A\.  U0!suax  jo  3q§PA\ 


38  THE  TECHSUGRAPH. 

NOTES  ON  A  RAILROAD  RE-SURVEY. 
By  B.  A.  Wait,  '92. 

The  road  was  one  of  the  main  trunk  lines  across  northern  Iowa. 
The  route  is  for  the  most  part  through  rolling  prairie,  and  runs 
nearly  at  right  angles  to  the  largest  streams.  The  company  had 
only  the  location  notes,  and  the  object  was  to  get  complete  notes  of 
everything  on  the  right-of-way,  not  only  for  maps  but  also  for  use 
in  making  a  number  of  improvements. 

The  party  consisted  of  a  chief  who  was  also  transitman,  two 
chainmen  for  track  measurements,  two  chainmen  for  location  of 
section  corners,  levelman,  and  rodman.  In  addition,  two  section- 
men  were  taken  off  of  each  successive  section,  one  to  drive  stakes 
and  one  to  dig  for  corners. 

The  transit  was  used  only  to  run  in  the  curves  and  to  take  the 
angles  of  the  road  with  the  land-lines.  The  transitman  kept  the 
hand-car  just  ahead  of  the  chainmen,  dropped  the  stakes,  and  took 
the  notes.  The  chaining  was  done  along  the  rail  except  around 
curves.  The  head  chainman  marked  the  stakes  and  laid  them  over 
the  chain-marks  on  the  rail.  The  stakes  were  driven,  by  one  of  the 
section-men,  seven  feet  to  the  right  of  the  center  of  the  track.  The 
rear-chainman  gave  the  distance  out  by  measuring  with  a  pole  from 
the  edge  of  the  rail.  The  rear-chainman  read  all  "pluses,"  and  in 
running  in  curves  acted  as  rear-flagman. 

The  beginning  and  ending  of  curves  were  set  by  eye  by  sighting 
along  the  rail  for  some  distance  back,  except  on  very  light  curves, 
when  they  were  set  with  the  transit.  The  transit  was  set  over  these 
points  and  the  deflections  were  taken  at  every  100-ft.  station.  The 
tangent  points  could  be  set  correctly  within  five  feet  by  eye,  and  this 
is  accurate  enough  where  the  back-sights  are  of  considerable  length. 
This  method  is  shorter  than  setting  them  with  the  transit,  unless  the 
beginning  of  the  curve  can  be  set  from  the  end  of  the  preceding  one. 

Levels  were  taken  at  every  station,  one  on  top  of  the  tie  and 
another  on  the  natural  surface.  Readings  were  also  taken  at  the 
bottom  of  all  culverts,  streams,  and  cattle-passes.  Elevations  of  high- 
water  marks  were  taken  whenever  possible.  Bench-marks  were  es- 
tablished every  half-mile.  The  benches  were  made  by  driving 
spikes  into  telegraph  poles  or  signal  posts,  or  they  were  taken  on 
some  part  of  the  depots  or  other  buildings. 

The  land-line  party  measured  on  all  section-lines  both  ways 
from  the  track  to  the  nearest  established  corner  of  that  section.     If 


POWELL— SQUARE  DRIFT-BOLTS.  39 

a  section  corner  was  found  within  one  hundred  feet  of  the  track  no 
measurements  were  taken  on  the  other  side.  In  many  places  the 
highways  had  been  graded  over  the  corners,  and  the  pick  and  shovel 
carried  by  the  second  section-man  were  necessary.  About  eighty- 
five  per  cent  of  the  corners  looked  for  were  found,  and  nearly  one 
half  of  those  were  covered.  The  corners  covered  over  a  foot  deep 
were  rarely  found.  When  the  corners  were  found  they  were  always 
"tied  in"  from  the  sides  of  the  roads  or  from  fence  corners.  The 
head  chainman  kept  the  notes.  Distances  to  all  streams  were  re- 
corded, as  well  as  the  depth  of  the  water  and  length  of  the  bridge. 

A  tracing  of  the  plat  of  every  town  was  made  from  the  records 
at  the  county  seat,  and  enough  angles  and  measurements  were  taken 
to  connect  the  surveys  of  the  road  with  that  of  the  town.  Every- 
thing on  the  right-of-way  was  located  with  reference  to  the  track. 
The  notes  of  station-ground  surveys  were  recorded  in  a  book  for 
that  purpose.  The  sketches  were  made  on  a  scale  of  fifty  or  a  hun- 
dred feet  to  the  inch.  The  station  surveys  were  made  by  whichever 
party  was  ahead. 

The  transit  book  was  one  made  for  that  survey.  It  was  8x9 
inches,  and  on  each  page  was  a  square  divided  into  quarters  to 
represent  the  section  and  its  divisions.  The  track  had  been  previ- 
ously sketched  in  from  an  old  map.  The  notes  were  recorded  along 
the  margin.  All  chain  and  transit  notes,  except  station  surveys, 
were  recorded  in  this  book.  Streams  and  hills  near  the  track  were 
sketched  in  by  the  transitman. 

The  plan  of  the  work  kept  all  the  parties  together.  The  method 
was  easy  and  expeditious,  and  all  the  data  necessary  was  determined 
with  sufficient  accuracy. 


SQUARE   DRIFT-BOLTS. 

By  J.  H.  Powell,  '91,  and  A.  E.  Harvey,  '91. 

In  No.  4  of  the  "Selected  Papers  of  the  Civil  Engineers'  Club  of 
the  University  of  Illinois,"  John  B.  Tscharner  gives  a  very  thorough 
discussion  of  a  series  of  experiments  on  the  holding  power  of  round 
drift-bolts.  The  writers  made  a  series  of  experiments  with  square 
bolts  to  determine  the  best  relation  between  the  diameter  of  hole 
and  the  size  of  bolt,  and  also  to  determine  the  relative  holding  power 
of  square  and  round  bolts. 


40 


THE  TECHNOGRAPH. 


The  experiments  were  made  with  the  University  testing  machine. 
The  bolts  were  of  steel,  i-inch  square,  about  30  inches  long,  the 
ends  square  except  that  the  sharp  edges  were  hammered  down 
slightly.  The  timber  used  was  pine,  about  such  as  that  used  in  Mr. 
Tscharner's  experiments.  Holes  K»tfi  Wj  and  ■;;  inches  in  diame- 
ter were  bored  as  nearly  as  possible  perpendicular  to  the  face  and 
grain  of  the  timber.  The  rods  were  driven  with  a  sledge  to  a  depth 
of  6  inches,  care  being  taken  to  start  the  rod  centrally  over  the 
hole. 

As  a  result  of  the  20  tests,  5  for  each  sized  hole,  the  average 
holding  power  was  found  to  be  as  in  Table  1. 

Table  I. 


Si/e  of  Rod. 

Size  of  Hole. 

Holding  Power  in  Pounds. 

6  inches  Depth. 

Per  inch  of  Depth. 

I  inch  square. 
1  inch  square. 
1  inch  square. 
1  inch  square. 

j  |  inches. 

] ;";  inches. 
\f.  inches. 
j  j  inches. 

3972 
4260 
4660 
4050 

662 
710 
777 
675 

From  the  table  we  see  that  a  j*-inch  hole  gives  the  maximum  hold- 
ing power. 

After  the  bolts  were  withdrawn  the  timber  was  split  and  the 
condition  of  the  wood  surrounding  the  holes  examined,  from  which 
it  appeared  that  in  the  holes  larger  than  ].j  inches,  only  the  corners 
of  the  bolt  had  held  effectively;  while  in  the  smaller  holes  the  wood 
fibers  were  so  crushed  and  torn  as  to  largely  decrease  their  power 
to  hold  the  bolt. 

As  compared  with  Mr.  Tscharner's  conclusions  our  experiments 
seem  to  show  that  for  holes  of  the  same  size  but  larger  than  {? 
inches  (the  size  which  he  found  to  give  a  maximum  holding  power 
for  1 -inch  round  rods),  the  holding  power  of  the  i-inch  square 
bolt  is  greater  than  that  of  the  i-inch  round  bolt,  the  quality  of  the 
timber  being  the  same  in  both  cases.     (See  Table  II.) 

Table  II. 


DIAMETEH    OF    11'  •!  K. 

tf 

H 

M 

H 

Round  Rod 

375  lbs. 
710  lbs. 

633  lbs. 
777  lbs. 

788  lbs. 

tare  Rod 

662  lbs. 

675  lbs. 

Table  II.  shows  the  holding  power  per  inch  of  depth  of  a  i-inch 
round  rod  and  a  i-inch  square  rod  in  different  sized  holes.  From 
the  table  it  is  seen  that  the  maximum  holding  power  of  the  round 


THOMPSON— COST  OF  BRICK  PAVEMENT.  41 

rod  is  greater  than  that  of  the  square  rod.  Since  the  cost  of  boring 
and  driving  is  the  same  in  each  case,  and  since  the  amount  of  iron 
in  the  round  rod  is  only  0.7854  of  that  in  the  square  one,  we  must 
decide  that  round  drift-bolts  have  the  advantage  over  square  ones, 
both  as  regards  holding  power  and  economy. 


COST  OF  BRICK  PAVEMENTS. 
By  A.  D.  Thompson,  '93. 

Brick  have  been  used  for  paving  purposes  in  this  country  and 
in  Europe  until  brick  pavements  are  no  longer  an  experiment.  They 
have  been  tested  under  all  conditions,  and  have  fulfilled  the  require- 
ments of  a  good  pavement  far  beyond  the  expectations  of  engineers. 
Because  of  the  cheapness,  noiselessness,  and  durability  of  brick 
pavements,  many  cities  are  investigating  the  merits  of  this  paving 
"with  a  view  to  adopting  it,  and  there^is  a  call  for  data  on  the  subject. 
This  call  has  been  amply  responded  to  in  all  cases  but  the  cost. 
Since  this  is  a  matter  of  such  wide  interest,  it  seems  proper  that 
central  Illinois,  which  may  be  called  the  home  of  brick  pavements, 
should  give  some  data  on  this  part  of  the  question. 

This  pavement  is  laid  with  one  course  of  brick  and  with  two 
courses  of  brick,  the  former  method  being,  of  course,  the  cheaper. 

In  the  latter  method,  the  ground  is  first  brought  to  the  required 
grade  and  convexity.  Then  from  three  to  five  inches  of  gravel  or 
cinders  is  placed  on  this  and  thoroughly  rolled.  This  is  followed  by 
a  course  of  brick  laid  flat  with  their  length  parallel  to  the  street,  all 
joints  being  well  broken.  One  inch  of  sand  comes  next,  and  is  fol- 
lowed by  a  course  of  brick  on  edge  with  their  length  at  right  angles 
to  the  curbing  and  with  the  joints  well  broken.  This  course  is 
tamped  and  rolled  thoroughly,  and  then  fine  sand  is  broomed  into 
the  joints  and  about  one-half  inch  of  sand  is  left  on  top. 

In  the  one-course  method,  the  ground  is  brought  to  the  required 
grade  and  convexity,  and  is  rolled  solid.  On  this  is  placed  from 
five  to  seven  inches  of  gravel  tamped  and  rolled  solid.  The  brick 
is  then  laid  on  edge  in  about  two  inches  of  clean  sand.  The  length 
is  laid  at  right  angles  to  the  curbing,  all  joints  being  well  broken. 
After  this  has  been  rolled  and  tamped  thoroughly,  about  one  half 
inch  of  sand  is  broomed  into  the  joints. 


42  THE  TSCHNOGSAPH. 

It  is  evident  that  the  only  ways  in  which  this  method  differs 
from  the  two-course  method  are: — ist,  one  course  of  brick  is  done 
away  with;  2d,  more  work  is  necessary  in  preparing  the  ground  and 
in  the  gravel  foundation;  and  3d,  more  gravel  is  used. 

Of  course  the  cost  of  such  work  will  vary  with  the  conditions 
existing  at  different  places,  and  with  the  nearness  of  material,  amount 
of  grading,  and  cost  of  labor.  Below  are  the  particulars  for  work 
done  in  Illinois. 

In  all  the  cases  cited  the  grading  was  comparatively  light,  and 
labor  cost  from  $1.25  to  Si. 60  per  day. 

Bloomington  was  one  of  the  first  cities  to  test  this  method  of 
paving,  having  laid  the  first  in  1874.  Since  then,  about  160,000 
square  yards  have  been  put  down  at  a  cost  of  about  $1.65  per 
square  yard.  The  brick  used  are  2x4x8  inches  and  cost  from 
S8.00  to  $8.50  per  thousand.  They  are  manufactured  in  the  city. 
Sand  cost  80  cents  per  cubic  yard  delivered.  Cinders  were  em- 
ployed for  a  foundation. 

Decatur  has  about  235,000  square  yards  of  brick  pavement, 
which  is  the  most  of  any  city  in  central  Illinois.  It  has  all  been 
laid  since  1884  at  a  cost  of  from  $1.34  to  £1-50  per  square  yard. 
Two  grades  of  brick  were  used  in  the  work.  The  bottom  course,  or 
softer  burned  brick,  are  2.76x4x8  inches  and  cost  S8.00  per  thou- 
sand; while  the  top  course,  or  harder  burned  brick,  are  2^x3^x7^ 
inches  and  cost  $9.00  per  thousand.  The  brick  are  made  in  the 
city.     The  sand  cost  75  cents  and  gravel  60  cents  per  cubic  yard. 

Champaign  laid  about  7,000  square  yards  of  brick  pavement  in 
1885  at  a  total  cost  of  Si. 87  per  square  yard.  Last  year  7,000  square 
yards  were  laid  at  a  cost  of  Si. 57  per  square  yard.  The  brick  are 
2x4x8  inches,  of  which  120  lay  a  square  yard.  They  are  made  in 
the  city  and  cost  $9.00  per  thousand  delivered.  The  contractor 
made  the  following  estimate  of  the  cost  per  square  yard,  including 
profit:  Grading,  9  cts,  the  dirt  to  be  moved  not  more  than  400  ft; 
gravel  and  sand,  using  gravel  for  foundation,  15  cts;  brick,  at  S9.00 
per  thousand,  S1.0S;  plank  curbing,  per  square  yard  of  pavement,  5 
cts;  laying  and  tamping  the  brick,  15  cts;  sundry  expenses,  5  cts; 
making  a  total  of  Si. 57  per  square  yard. 

Springfield  has  laid  about  10,000  square  yards  within  the  past 
three  years,  at  a  cost  of  from  Si. 48  to  Si. 62  per  square  yard.*  The 
brick  used  are  2x4x8  inches  and  cost  £9.00  per  thousand  delivered 
on  the  ground.  Sand  and  gravel  cost  S1.50  per  cubic  yard  delivered 
on  cars  at  Springfield. 


HAY-RAILROAD  GRADE  CROSSINGS.  43 

Danville  laid  about  26,500  square  yards  of  brick  pavement  last 
year,  at  a  cost  of  $1.45  per  square  yard.  Two  kinds  of  brick  were 
used  promiscuously, — one  from  Bloomington  and  the  other  from 
Grape  Creek.  The  Bloomington  brick  are  2x4x8  inches  and  cost 
from  $8.00  to  $8.50  per  thousand  delivered  on  cars  at  Bloomington. 
The  Grape  Creek  brick  are  4x4 x  12  inches. 

The  only  city  using  the  one-course  system  of  brick  in  central 
Illinois  is  Peoria.  Considerable  pavement  has  been  laid  in  that  city 
at  a  cost  of  from  $1.50  to  $1.70  per  square  yard.  The  brick  are 
4x5x12  inches,  and  thus  by  laying  only  one  course  the  pavement  is 
five  inches  deep  against  six  inches  where  the  two-course  system  is 
used  with  common  sized  brick.  Sand  and  gravel  cost  from  75  cts 
to  90  cts  on  the  streets. 

Steubenville,  O.,  uses  only  one  course  of  common  sized  brick, 
which  has  cost  from  95  cts  to  $1.00  per  square  yard.  The  one- 
course  method  with  common  sized  brick  is  well  adapted  to  cities 
having  light  traffic,  and  is  being  adopted  by  many  of  the  smaller  cities. 

In  all  of  these  cases,  the  first  cost,  or  contract  price,  has  been 
given.  The  cost  of  repairs  has  been  omitted  because  whenever  any 
repairs  have  been  necessary,  the  cost  has  been  too  small  to  be  taken 
into  consideration. 


INTERLOCKED    VS.  UNPROTECTED    RAILROAD    GRADE 

CROSSINGS. 
By  W.  M.  Hay,  '91. 

The  rapid  growth  of  the  network  of  railroads  of  this  country 
has  been  marvelous.  As  this  network  becomes  more  and  more  in- 
terlaced, the  number  of  railroad  crossings  is  greatly  increased.  This 
fact  has  become  a  potent  and  perplexing  question,  especially  to  rail- 
road managers,  who  desire  to  know  to  what  extent  they  may  oppose 
a  new  road  from  crossing  their  established  lines.  When  railroad 
crossings  can  not  be  avoided,  the  question  arises  as  to  what  should 
be  done  to  reduce  their  disadvantages  to  a  minimum.  It  therefore 
remains  to  determine  from  an  economical  standpoint  whether  the 
new  line  shall  cross  the  old  one  at  grade,  that  is,  on  a  level,  or  by 
an  over  or  an  under  crossing.  If  at  grade,  the  question  then  arises 
as  to  the  advisability  of  establishing  an  interlocking  switch  and 
signal  system  at  such  a  crossing,  whereby  the  usual  stop  may  be 
avoided. 


THE   TECHNOGRAPH. 

That  such  problems  as  the  above  present  themselves  for  con- 
sideration, there  is  no  doubt;  yet  that  they  are  very  frequently 
ignored,  is  proven  by  the  fact  that  over  nine  tenths  of  the  crossings 
of  Illinois  are  unprotected  grade  crossings.  The  remainder  of  the 
crossings  either  are  provided  with  interlocking  and  signaling  appa- 
ratus, or  are  over  or  under  crossings.  An  act  of  the  State  Legisla- 
ture, passed  in  1S87,  provides  that  when  a  system  of  approved 
interlocking  switch  and  signal  apparatus  shall  be  constructed  and 
maintained  at  any  crossing  which  shall  prevent  the  possibility  of 
trains  colliding,  then  trains  may  pass  over  such  crossing  without 
first  coming  to  a  stop.  Laws  of  essentially  the  same  nature  have 
been  passed  in  many  of  the  states.  In  the  eastern  states  advantage 
of  such  laws  has  been  taken,  and  interlocking  and  signaling  devices 
are  rapidly  coming  into  more  general  use.  The  time  and  expense 
involved  in  stopping  trains  at  unprotected  grade  crossings,  shows 
that  the  day  can  not  be  far  distant  when  all  railroads  will  find  it  to 
their  interest  to  provide  interlocking  devices  at  such  places.  These 
appliances  would  afford  not  only  greater  safety,  higher  speed,  and 
more  convenience  to  the  traveling  public,  but  (as  is  shown  farther 
on)  would  also  reduce  the  operating  expenses  of  the  road. 

As  is  well  known,  an  interlocked  grade  crossing  is  one  which  is 
provided  with  signals  and  switches  located  at  certain  points  near 
the  crossing  and  operated  by  a  series  of  interlocking  levers,  under 
control  of  an  operator,  in  such  a  manner  that  it  is  impossible, 
either  through  the  negligence  of  the  operator  or  of  the  inattention 
of  the  engine-man,  for  two  trains  to  collide  at  the  crossing.  The 
details  of  the  interlocking  and  signaling  apparatus  for  a  single  track 
grade  crossing,  are  about  as  follows:  At  300  feet  each  side  of  the 
crossing  on  both  roads,  derail  switches  are  placed,  which  are  ope- 
rated by  the  interlocking  levers  in  a  tower  at  the  crossing.  To 
guard  against  the  accidental  opening  of  each  switch  when  a  train  is 
passing  over  it,  a  thin  iron  bar,  about  40  feet  long,  is  hinged  to  the 
outside  of  the  switch  rail.  This  bar,  called  a  detector  bar,  moves 
in  a  vertical  plane  and  is  so  hung  that  it  can  not  be  moved  length- 
wise without  being  raised.  It  is  so  long  that  it  can  not  be  raised 
between  the  trucks  of  a  car,  thus  making  it  impossible  to  move  the 
switch  while  a  train  is  passing  over  it.  When  the  track  is  clear  this 
bar  is  raised  by  the  first  movement  of  the  lever  which  controls  the 
switch.  Near  this  switch  the  home  signal  is  located.  This  signal 
is  of  the  semaphore  pattern  and  is  placed  on  the  engine-man's  side 
of  the  track.     The   signal-blade   is  movable    about  its   horizontal 


HAY-RAILROAD  GRADE  CROSSINGS.  45 

axis,  and  usually  is  painted  red  on  the  face  farther  from  the  cross- 
ing. The  distant  signal  is  located  1,200  feet  beyond  the  home  sig- 
nal and  is  of  similar  pattern  with  the  exception  that  the  farther  face 
of  the  blade  is  painted  green. 

All  switches  and  signals  are  operated  by  the  series  of  interlock- 
ing levers  in  the  tower  at  the  crossing.  These  levers  are  painted 
and  numbered  to  correspond  to  the  movements  they  control.  The 
levers  operating  derail  switches  are  painted  black,  the  home  signal 
levers  red,  and  the  distant  signal  levers  green.  The  connection 
between  the  tower  and  the  derailing  switches  is  generally  made  by 
rods,  and  with  the  home  and  distant  signals  by  wire.  For  a  single 
track  crossing  six  levers  are  generally  required,  two  operating  the 
four  derailing  switches,  and  four  operating  the  four  home  and  the 
four  distant  signals. 

The  normal  position  of  all  signals  is  at  danger  with  derail 
switches  open.  To  allow  an  approaching  train  on  one  road  to  pass 
the  crossing,  the  man  in  the  tower  must  first  close  the  derail 
switches  for  that  road  by  moving  the  switch  lever  operating  these 
switches.  This  movement  automatically  locks  the  switch  and  sig- 
nal levers  of  the  other  road  and  at  the  same  time  unlocks  the  signal 
levers  of  the  first  road.  The  signal  man  then  moves  the  signal  lever 
which  operates  the  signals  on  the  side  of  the  approaching  train, 
which  first  brings  the  home  and  then  the  distant  signal  to  the  safety 
position.  The  approaching  train  then  has  a  clear  track.  After  the 
train  has  passed,  the  signal  man  must  first  bring  the  distant  and 
then  the  home  signal  to  the  danger  position,  before  the  derail 
switches  can  again  be  opened. 

If,  after  the  train  has  procured  a  clear  track,  an  engine-man  ot 
an  approaching  train  on  the  other  road  should  attempt  to  cross,  by 
disregarding  the  danger  signals,  his  train  would  be  derailed  at  the 
derailing  switch,  and  the  spirit  of  the  law  carried  out,  which  says 
that  the  apparatus  shall  prevent  the  possibility  of  trains  colliding 
at  the  crossing.  Accidents  of  this  nature  have  very  seldom  if  ever 
occurred,  and  so  far  as  can  be  ascertained  not  an  accident  has  yet 
occurred  through  the  fault  of  the  interlocking  apparatus. 

Next,  let  the  attention  of  the  reader  be  turned  to  the  expense 
of  (1)  the  interlocked  grade  crossing,  and  (2)  the  unprotected  grade 
crossing. 

An  interlocked  grade  crossing  similar  to  that  described  above 
costs  about  $3,000,  including  cost  of  erection.  The  annual  expense 
is  however  of  much  more  importance  than  the  first  cost.     As  the 


46  THE  TECHNOGBAPR 

levers  demand  constant  attendance,  the  services  of  two  men  will  be 
daily  required,  whose  salaries  may  be  taken  at  $45  per  month  each. 
This  gives  as  the  yearly  cost  of  operation  $45  x  12  x  2  =  Si,o8o. 
The  annual  cost  of  repairs,  inspection,  depreciation,  etc.,  will  be 
about  $120.  The  annual  cost  of  operation  and  maintenance  then 
is  5 1,200.  As  capital  can  generally  be  obtained  at  5  per  cent  inter- 
est, the  original  cost  of  S3,ooo  may  be  procured  at  an  annual 
expense  of  S3,ooox.o5  =  $150.  Adding  this  to  the  cost  of  opera- 
tion and  maintenance  we  find  that  an  annual  outlay  of  $1,350  will 
be  required  to  provide  and  maintain  an  interlocking  switch  and  sig- 
nal apparatus  at  a  single  track  crossing. 

Next,  consider  the  expense  of  the  unprotected  grade  crossing 
with  the  usual  stopping  of  trains.  Careful  estimates  make  the 
expense  of  stopping  a  train  from  35  to  75  cents,  and  sometimes 
more.  Taking  40  cents  as  an  average  expense,  independent  of  the 
kind  and  length  of  train,  we  find  the  expense  per  annum  of  a  daily 
train  to  be  $.40  x  365  =  $146.00.  Considering  an  average  traffic 
of  10  daily  trains  each  way  for  each  road,  we  have  $146.00x10x4= 
$5,840  as  the  total  annual  expense  which  the  crossing  brings  to  the 
two  roads.  This  sum  does  not  include  the  pay  of  a  gateman  who 
is  oftentimes  needed  at  such  places. 

Comparing  the  annual  expense  of  interlocked  grade  crossing 
with  the  above  result  we  find  that  as  far  as  economical  advantages 
are  concerned  the  system  of  interlocking  is  far  superior  to  the 
unprotected  grade  crossing.  The  reason  then  for  the  scarcity  of 
interlocking  devices  is  not  at  first  thought  so  quickly  apparent,  yet 
if  we  examine  into  the  question  we  may  find  several  plausible,  if 
not  possible,  reasons  for  this  deficiency:  1.  The  roads  may 
fail  to  agree  upon  what  proportion  of  the  annual  expense  each 
should  bear,  as  one  road  may  be  benefited  more  than  the  other  and 
yet  refuse  to  pay  more  than  half  the  expense.  2.  The  expense  of 
stopping  at  a  grade  crossing  is  paid  in  loss  of  time,  discomfort, 
wear  and  tear  of  the  rolling  stock,  etc.,  and  goes  on  continually, 
draining  the  resources  of  the  company  without  notice;  while  the 
expense  of  interlocking  is  paid  in  cash  and  is  thus  much  more 
noticeable.  3.  Some  roads  may  be  so  situated  that  they  can  not 
afford  the  additional  cash  outlay,  or  may  be  waiting  for  more 
improvements  in  interlocking  devices.  Whatever  be  the  reasons,  it 
is  evident  that  an  interlocking  switch  and  signal  apparatus  under 
the  conditions  assumed  above  would  more  than  pay  for  itself  during 
the  first  year  of  its  operation. 


KEENE— ALUMINUM  AND  ITS  ALLOYS.  47 

NOTES  ON  ALUMINUM  AND  ITS  ALLOYS. 

By  E.  S.  Keene,  '90. 

The  first  researches  in  the  preparation  of  aluminum  date  back 
to  1807,  Dut  it  was  not  until  1854  that  it  was  produced  pure,  and  its 
properties  determined.  It  was  then  considered  one  of  the  precious 
metals,  and  was  valued  at  $240  per  pound.  Three  years  later  the 
cost  had  been  reduced  to  $32  per  pound.  A  steady  decrease  has 
since  continued  until  to-day,  commercially  pure  aluminum  can  be 
bought  for  $1  per  pound.  It  is  not  found  in  the  metallic  state,  but 
occurs  chiefly  in  the  form  of  silicates,  and  in  this  form  is  more  widely 
distributed  than  any  of  the  other  metals.  Its  cost  is  due  to  the  dif- 
ficulty in  extracting  the  metal  from  the  ores.  In  color  it  is  a  silvery 
white,  but  after  being  worked  it  has  a  slightly  blueish  tint. 

Lightness  is  one  of  the  most  striking  properties  of  aluminum. 
A  cubic  inch  of  the  metal  weighs  .09  pounds,  while  an  equal 
amount  of  cast-iron  weighs  .26  pounds,  making  aluminum  therefore 
weigh  about  one-third  as  much  as  cast-iron.  The  specific  gravity 
of  cast  aluminum,  as  determined  by  Prof.  Stratton  is,  for  99  per 
cent  pure,  2.622;  for  97^  per  cent  pure,  2.647;  aluminum  with  10.6 
per  cent  silicon,  2.645.  Deville  gave  the  specific  gravity  of  pure 
aluminum  as  2.56. 

Aluminum  is  one  of  the  most  malleable  and  ductile  of  all 
metals.  It  may  be  hammered  into  sheets  as  thin  as  gold-leaf,  or 
drawn  into  the  finest  wire.  Its  melting  point,  as  given  by  different 
authorities,  is  from  1,200  to  1,400  degrees,  F.  Impurities  help  to 
raise  the  melting  point.  It  is  satisfactorily  welded  by  electricity,  but 
is  very  red-short,  and  will  not  bear  hammering  at  a  high  heat.  Al- 
though it  may  be  rolled  cold,  aluminum  is  most  malleable  at  about 
300  degrees  F.  At  above  400  degrees  F.  it  becomes  red-short. 
Cold-rolled,  or  hammered,  it  becomes  hard,  and  requires  frequent 
annealing  to  keep  it  from  cracking.  This  is  done  by  heating  to 
about  800  degrees  F.,  at  which  temperature  a  bar  of  iron  will  ap- 
pear slightly  red  in  the  dark.  Aluminum  at  this  temperature  will 
not  appear  red.  This  temperature  may  be  determined  in  a  prac- 
tical way  by  drawing  a  pine  stick  across  the  surface,  the  mark  of 
which  will  burn  slowly  away.  After  being  heated  the  metal  should 
be  allowed  to  cool  very  gradually.  Light  articles  may  be  annealed 
by  plunging  into  water  after  being  heated.  Wire  may  be  annealed 
by  placing  it  in  boiling  water  and  allowing  it  to  cool  with  water. 

-4 


Illl.    I  I.'  IIXOGR  1/7/. 

Iii  experimenting  with  its  effects  in  cast-iron,  J.  W.  Keep  has 
found  that  aluminum  turns  the  combined  carbon  to  graphite,  that  is, 
turns  a  white  iron-gray.  It  also  aids  in  increasing  tensile  strength 
and  aids  in  obtaining  sound  castings,  which  are  susceptible  of  a 
high  polish  and  are  free  from  oxidation.  The  same  writer  found 
that  in  wroughtiron  and  steel  castings  aluminum  prevented  blow 
holes,  raised  the  tensile  strength,  and  doubled  the  power  to  resist 
shock. 

In  order  to  find  a  better  and  cheaper  substitute  for  German  silver, 
which  industry  in  the  United  States  amounts  to  upwards  of  $6,000,- 
000  annually,  Eugene  H.  Cowles,  after  experimenting  with  upwards 
of  two  hundred  different  mixtures,  found  that  the  addition  of  1.25 
per  cent  of  aluminum  to  a  manganese,  copper  alloy,  converted  it 
from  one  of  the  most  refractory  of  metals  in  the  casting  process 
into  one  of  superior  casting  qualities  and  more  non-corrodible  in 
many  instances  than  either  German  or  nickel  silver.  This  metal  he 
calls  silver  bronze,  and  is  composed  of  manganese  18,  aluminum  1.25, 
silicon  5,  zinc  13,  and  copper  67.5  per  cent.  Pure  aluminum  has 
been  used  for  instruments  of  precision,  but  only  to  a  limited  extent. 
The  pure  metal  is  scarcely  rigid  enough,  and  the  makers  find  that 
in  working,  the  metal  is  apt  to  tear  under  the  tool,  and  does  not  give 
clean  threads.  Tiers  Argent,  an  alloy  of  95  parts  aluminum  and  5 
parts  of  silver,  has  been  used,  which  gives  better  results,  as,  while  it 
is  not  much  heavier,  it  is  more  rigid,  harder,  and  works  better  under 
tools.  It  withstands  the  corroding  action  of  the  atmosphere  nearly 
as  well  as  aluminum.  An  alloy  of  nickel  and  aluminum  might  be 
used  for  such  purposes,  as  a  small  per  cent  of  nickel  hardens  alumi- 
num without  destroying  its  other  properties.  As  aluminum  can  be 
obtained  absolutely  free  from  iron,  it  can  be  used  to  advantage  for 
apparatus  where  non-  magnetic  properties  are  required. 

In  the  drawing  press,  as  stated  by  Oberlin  Smith,  the  metal 
does  not  appear  to  stand  as  much  strain  in  bending  as  brass  or 
"gelding,"  but  in  drawing  will  apparently  stand  more  than  either 
without  annealing.  Aluminum,  therefore,  has  the  very  desirable 
property  in  drawing  deep  articles,  it  does  not  require  the  frequent 
annealings  which  are  required  in  brass  and  iron. 

Such  excessive  claims  have  been  made  for  aluminum  that  the 
public  has  been  led  to  believe  that  it  might  be  used  for  anything, 
and  that  with  cheap  aluminum  all  other  metals  would  be  superseded. 
U though  aluminum  is  a  wonderful  metal,  there  is  no  danger,  as  has 


KEENE— ALUMINUM  AND  ITS  ALLOYS.  49 

been  said,  of  its  "revolutionizing  the  world."  That  it  has  some 
bad  qualities  is  shown  by  the  following  statement,  made  by  Alfred 
E.  Hunt,  President  of  the  Pittsburgh  Reduction  Co.,  in  a  lecture 
before  the  Boston  Society  of  Arts:  "For  many  purposes  the  pure 
metal  cannot  be  so  advantageously  used  as  that  containing  three  or 
four  per  cent  of  impurities.  The  pure  metal  is  very  soft  and  not  so 
strong  as  the  impure.  The  thin  coat  of  oxide  which  it  gains  on  ex- 
posure gives  it  a  pewtery  appearance  which  makes  it  undesirable  for 
table  ware.  It  becomes  pasty  as  low  as  1,000  degrees  F.,  melts  at 
1,300  degrees  F.,  and  loses  its  tensile  strength  and  much  of  its  rigidity 
as  low  as  400  to  500  degrees.  It  is  inferior  to  copper  as  a  conductor 
of  electricity;  in  fact,  it  is  only  half  as  good.  Its  lack  of  rigidity  is 
an  obstacle  to  its  use  for  many  purposes,  such  as  castings.  In  roll- 
ing it,  not  nearly  so  much  draft  can  be  given  in  the  rolls  as  in  the 
case  of  rolling  steel.  In  cold  rolling  it  requires  to  be  annealed 
oftener  than  steel.  Alloys  of  the  metal  increase  its  brittleness  more 
than  they  do  its  hardness.  Its  tensile  strength  per  square  inch  is  not 
greater  than  that  of  common  cast  iron,  and  only  about  one-third 
that  of  structural  steel,  while  its  compressive  strength  is  less  than 
one-sixth  that  of  cast-iron.  The  modulus  of  elasticity  of  cast-alum- 
inum is  about  11,000,000,  being  only  one-half  that  of  cast-iron  and 
one-third  that  of  steel.  Under  transverse  test,  a  one  inch  square 
bar  of  cast  iron,  four  feet,  six  inches  between  supports,  will  sustain 
a  load  of  500  pounds,  with  a  deflection  of  two  inches,  while  a  simi- 
lar bar  of  aluminum  would  deflect  over  two  inches  with  a  load  of 
250  pounds." 

It  combines  with  iron  in  all  proportions,  but  none  of  the  alloys 
with  that  metal  are  valuable  except  those  with  very  small  per  cent- 
ages  of  aluminum.  The  addition  of  aluminum  does  not  lower  the 
melting  point  of  steel,  as  has  been  claimed,  nor  does  it  increase  its 
fluidity. 

Ten  per  cent  aluminum  bronze  (ten  per  cent  of  aluminum  with 
ninety  per  cent  of  copper)  has  a  tensile  strength  of  from  70,000  to 
75,000  pounds  per  square  inch  in  castings.  Rolled  into  plates,  the 
tensile  strength  is  from  100,000  to  120,000  pounds  per  square  inch. 
It  is  a  very  close,  dense  metal  of  a  beautiful  yellow  color  and  suscep- 
tible of  taking  a  very  high  polish.  Unlike  any  other  varieties  of 
bronze,  which  are  red-short,  it  may  be  worked  at  a  high  heat  as  easily 
as  wrought-iron.  One  great  advantage  it  has  over  other  varieties  of 
bronze  or  brass  is  that  it  is  comparatively  free  from  oxidation  in  the 


/  ill.    TECHNOGRAPH. 


air.  In  castings  it  has  a  specific  gravity  of  about  7.8.  Its  melting 
point  is  about  the  same  as  ordinary  brass.  Five  per  cent  bronze 
has  a  tensile  strength  of  about  60,000  pounds  per  square  inch.  In 
seven  per  cent  bronze  the  tensile  strength  is  from  60,000  to  70,000 
pounds  per  square  inch. 

The  following  tables  show  tests,  made  by  the  writer,  on  cast 
aluminum  and  aluminum  bronze.  The  metal  used  in  the  test  was 
kindly  furnished  by  the  Pittsburgh  Reduction  Co.,  of  Pittsburgh,  Pa. 
The  pieces  were  ingots,  each  ingot  being  cut  into  two  or  more  test 
pieces.  The  pieces  used  in  the  tests  for  tensile  strength  were  melted 
and  cast  into  cylinders  for  the  compression  tests. 

The  flow  of  the  metal  under  tensile  test  seems  to  be  very  local. 
The  per  cent  of  elongation  reducing  rapidly  in  increasing  length 
from  the  point  of  fracture.  Under  compression  the  silicon  and  99 
per  cent  pieces  kept  their  cylindrical  shape  to  the  point  of  fracture, 
but  the  97^  per  cent  piece,  at  a  load  of  30,000  pounds,  had  become 
very  much  distorted.  At  50,000,  the  99  per  cent  piece  was  flattened 
to  almost  one-third  its  original  length  and  showed  a  small  crack  in 
the  side.     The  cracks  in  all  of  the  pieces  were  in  spiral  form. 


TENSILE  TESTS. 


E2.8 

0  ff. 

3  0 

"    p 

Dimensio 
duced 
inch 

13 
ft 
►1 

0 

n 

cr.  a 

0  r* 

•0  s 

3  8 

p 
p  K 

c  n 

0    C- 

(113    3 
«   p   » 

3  r» 

a  3 

n   3 

2  0 

O 

3 

3  - 

n 

5'3 

3 

fi 

ere 
p 

3-  <T 

s? 

I 

99  per  cent,  aluminum 

.229 x .664 

.1825X.515 

23 

5820 

16180 

2  99  per  cent.          " 

.225  x .612 

.I73X.548 

21 

6500 

1 7 140 

3  97/4  Per  cent.      " 

.254  x  .663'.  .232x650 

12.2 

4540 

10660 

4  97/4  per  cent.      " 

.256 x .662   .218X.630 

14-3 

4600 

12090 

5  Al.  with  10  6  silicon  .  . 

.671  x  .258    .661.X.248 

8.2 

18510 

6 

.660X.257;  .658X.239 
.452  diam.  .412  diam. 

5 
i3  3 

19130 
60210 

7 

7  per  cent.  al.  bronze. 

33420 

8 

7  per  cent.  al.  bronze. 

.433  diam. 

.398  diam. 

15  2 

41230 

64580 

9 

7  per  cent.  al.  bronze. 

.446  diam. 

.408  diam. 

12.4 

26700 

62350 

[0 

5  per  cent.  al.  bronze. 

.458  diam. 

.453  diam. 

8 

24300 

57716 

II 

10  per  cent.  al.  bronze  .305  diam. 

.288  diam. 

19.2 

48700 

74790 

12 

10  per  cent.  al.  bronze  .312  diam. 

.293  diam. 

18. 

47600 

72820 

BAWDEX—  COUNTERBALANCE  ON  LOCOMOTIVES. 


51 


COMPRESSION  TESTS. 


Load,  pounds. 

99  per  cent,  alumi- 
num. 

97j^  per  cent,  alum- 
inum. 

Aluminum  with  10.6 
per  cent.  Si. 

Length  x  Diameter, 
Inches. 

Length  x  Diameter, 
Inches. 

Length  x  Diameter, 
Inches. 

o 

1.299  x    .965 
1.298  x    .965 
1.298  x    .965 
1.298  x    .965 
1.296  x    .966 
1.294  x    .967 
1.286  x    .970 
1.279  x    -972 
1.267  x    .976 
1.252  x    .983 
1.233  x    .991 
1. 212  x  1. 000 
1. 180  x  1. 017 
1. 150  x  1.032 
1. 1 16  x  1.050 
.748  x  1.288 

1.548  x    .974 
1.548  x    .974 
1.546  x    .974 
1.545  x    .974 
1.543  x    .9745 
1.537  x    .976 
1.534  x    .977 
1.529  x    .979 
1.526  x    .981 

1. 175    X    .983 
1. 173    x    .983 
1. 173    x    .983 
1. 172    x    .983 
1. 171    x    .9835 
1. 171    x    .9836 
1. 170    x    .9838 
1. 168    x    .984 
1. 167    x    .984 
1. 167    x    .9845 
1. 165    x    .9842 
1. 164    x    .9844 
1. 1626  x    .9846 
I.I6I4X    .986 
1. 160    x    .9865 
1.078    x  1.073 

500 

1,000 

I,  coo 

2,000 

3,000    

4,000 

5,000 

6,000 

7,000 

8,000 

1. 513  x    .985 

Q.OOO 

10,000 

1.494  x    .992 

11,000 

12,000 

1.458  x  1.007 

1. 108  x  1. 187 

Failed. 

25,000 

31,600 

40,000     .... 

•515x1.55 

41,300     

Failed. 

50,000 

.482  x  1. 612 

EFFECT  OF  COUNTERBALANCE  ON  LOCOMOTIVES. 

By  S.  D.  Bawden,  '90. 

In  the  locomotive  strong  forces  are  at  work,  necessitating  strong 
parts  to  stand  the  wear  and  tear  of  use,  and  one  of  the  things  for 
the  engineer  yet  to  overcome  is  the  necessity  of  much  weight  to 
give  corresponding  strength.  The  weights  thus  used  in  the  loco- 
motive, and  falling  within  the  scope  of  this  paper,  may  be  separated 
into  two  classes — the  reciprocating  parts  and  the  revolving  parts. 
Of  these,  the  revolving  parts  can  be  easily  balanced,  by  placing 
equal  weights  on  the  opposite  side  of  the  axis  of  rotation;  but  the 
reciprocating  parts  vary  in  velocity,  and  therefore  can  be  balanced 
by  a  given  weight  for  only  one  position.  It  is  possible  to  exactly 
balance  the  reciprocating  parts  at  the  dead  centers,  or  at  the  quar- 
ters, or,  indeed,  at  any  point  in  the  revolution,  but  they  will  not  be 
balanced  for  other  points.  For  this  reason,  with  respect  to  the 
reciprocating  parts  on  a  locomotive,  an  approximate  counterbal- 
ance is  used,  which  gives  an  excess  of  weight  in  some  positions, 


/•///.   TECITNOGRAPJf. 

and  less  than  the  required  amount  in  others.  As  the  speed  of  the 
locomotive  increases,  the  centrifugal  effect  of  this  excess  of  coun- 
terbalance increases,  until  it  may  become  more  than  the  portion  of 
the  weight  of  the  locomotive  assigned  to  the  wheel  in  question. 
The  purpose  of  this  paper  is  to  investigate  somewhat  the  rela- 
tion of  this  centrifugal  force  and  the  weight  of  the  locomotive  as 
transmitted  through  the  driving-springs. 

In  the  driving-wheel  of   the  locomotive  we    have  a  crank-pin 
and  its  boss,  which  are  eccentric  with  respect  to  the  axis  of  revolu- 
tion of  the  wheel.    Neglecting  the 
weight  of  the  rim,  spokes,  etc.,  in 
Fig.  i.,  let 
C  =  weight  of  the  crank-pin  and 

boss, 
D  =  distance  of  center  of  grav- 
ity of  C  from  axis. 
Place  opposite  C  a  weight  (C) 
at  a  distance  (D')  from  the 
axis,  so  that 

CD  =  CD'  (i) 
Then  these  weights  are  in  statical  balance:  i.  e.,  the  wheel  will  be 
balanced  in  any  position  whatever  in  which  it  may  be  placed  about 
the  axis;  and,  as  can  easily  be  proved,  the  wheel  will  be  also  in  run- 
ning balance.  Stating  this  as  a  rule — A  running  balance  is  a  stati- 
cal balance,  and  vice  versa. 

Next  comes  the  question,  whether,  if  we  consider  the  weight  of 
the  wheel,  its  rim,  spokes,  etc.,  having  the  wheel  in  running  and  stat- 
ical balance,  and  add  an  eccentric  weight,  the  weights  which  have 
already  been  balanced  will  have  any  effect  upon  the  new  weight. 
As  shown  above,  the  revolving  weights  in  the  locomotive  may  easily 
be  balanced  but  it  is  the  reciprocating  weights  that  cause  the  diffi- 
culty. ( )n  account  of  this,  the  builders  of  locomotives  have  exper- 
imented till  they  should  find  the  proportion  of  the  weights  of  the 
reciprocating  parts  which,  placed  opposite  the  crank-pin,  would 
give  the  best  effect.  In  this  way  they  reduce  the  excess  of  counter- 
balance but  do  not  remove  it  entirely,  and  it  is  this  excess  which  is 
considered  as  an  eccentric  weight  in  the  following  discussion. 

With  the  wheel  in  statical  or  running  balance,  the  center  of 
gravity  lies  in  the  axis.  With  an  eccentric  load  added  to  the  bal- 
an<  ed  load,  the  center  of  gravity  is  moved  from  the  axis  to  some 


JiAWDEN    COUNTERBALANCE  ON  LOCOMOTIVES.  53 

point  between  the  eccentric  load  and  the  axis.     In  Fig.  2,  let  C,  C, 
D,  D',  be  as  in  Fig.  1.    Added  to  C  and  C  is  the  weight  of  the  rim, 


spokes,  hub,  etc.     These  are  all  to  be  considered  as  balanced,  and 

fulfilling  the  conditions  of  Fig.  1.     Then  the  center  of  gravity  of  all 

these  weights  will  be  at  H,  the  axis  of  revolution. 

Let  Wc  =  the  balanced  load  =  C+C'+Rim+etc, 

Wj  =  the  eccentric  load, 

r'  =  distance    of  center  of  gravity  of  eccentric  load    from 
axis, 

r"  =  distance  of  new  center  of   gravity,  after  W^  is  added, 
from  axis. 

Then  W^W^  weight  of  the  whole  wheel.       » 
r"  is  found  from  the  relation, 

(w^w/y^w^'  (2) 

W,  r' 

r"= (3) 

W  +WX 

Let  v"  =  velocity  of  new  center  of  gravity,  as  it  revolves  about 
axis,  in  feet  per  second, 

v'  =  velocity  of  W,  in  feet  per  second. 
W,  v'2 

Then =  F1  =  centrifugal  force  of  W,        | 

gr' 


THE  TECHNOGRAPB. 

WW, 


•=Fj  =  centrifugal  force  of  whole  wheel.  (5) 
gr" 
Substituting  in  (5)  the  value  of  r"  as  found  in 

(W.+W,)'  \ 

F2= (6) 

g  W,  r' 
Let  N  — the  number  of  revolutions  per  second, 
Then2rr' N  =  v'  and  2wr"N=v"  (7) 

4r-r'-N-^v''  and  4rrV'-N2=v"2  (8) 

Substituting  in  the  second  equation  of  (S)  the  value  of  r"  as 
found  in  (3), 

.    ,  (       W>       ) 


i  W„4-W,  \ 


r'2N2=v"2  (9) 


rw0+w,-)2 

[  y'*  («o) 

But  from  (8),  4-V-N2  =  v,;, 

(W.+W.V 

Therefore  v,2=  J [  v"2  (n) 

(.     W,       ) 
Substituting  the  value  of  v'2  from  (n)  in  (4),  we  have 

(Wo+W,)"  v"2 
F,= (12) 

gW.r' 

(Wo+W02  v"2 

But  from  (6)  F„= (13) 

g  W,  r' 
Therefore  Fi=F2  (14) 

This  proves,  then,  that  an  eccentric  weight  has  the  same  effect 
in  producing  centrifugal  force,  whether  acting  alone,  or  placed  in  a 
balanced  wheel. 

Since  there  is  an  excess  of  counterbalance  in  the  wheel  of  the 
locomotive,  the  center  of  gravity  of  the  wheel  will  not  lie  in  the 
axis,  but  between  the  axis  and  the  excess  of  weight.  The  centrifu- 
gal tendency,  then,  of  the  wheel,  will  be  the  same,  whether  we  con- 
sider the  mass  of  the  whole  wheel  concentrated  at  the  center  of 
gravity  of  the  wheel,  or  only  the  excess  of  counterbalance  concen- 
trated at  the  center  of  gravity  of  that  excess  of  weight. 

The  locomotive  driving-wheel  is  so  placed  that  it  can  move 
vertically,  either  up  or  down,  but  in  each  case  there  is  a  resistance 


BA  WDEX—COUXTERBALANCE  OX  LOCOMOTIVES. 


55 


to  its  motion;  above,  there  is  the  pressure  of  the  weight  of  the 
locomotive,  transmitted  through  the  driving-springs;  below,  there  is 
the  rail.  This  latter,  of  course,  is  to  be  considered  as  a  continuous 
beam,  and  of  so  much  rigidity  that  its  action  may  be  neglected.  It 
is  true  that  we  should  expect,  with  just  as  much  reason,  to  find 
effects  from  the  excess  of  counterbalance  in  other  directions  than 
the  vertical,  and  such  effects  have  been  experimented  upon  by 
others,  but  the  scope  of  this  paper  is  simply  to  investigate  the  ver- 
tical action  of  the  weights  in  question. 

The  motion  of  the  wheel  may  be  compared  to  that  of  a  body 
revolving  about  an  axis,  and  free  to  move  vertically,  up  or  down, 
against  resistances.     In  Fig.  3,  let 


A=center  of  gravity   of   wheel,  with  mass  of  wheel  concen- 
trated there, 


////.   TBCHNOGRAPff. 

I;      axis    iree  to  mu\  e  vertically  against  springs  1),  K), 
k     radius  of  center  of  gravity  of  wheel. 

In  order  to  simplify  the  conditions  of  the  problem,  we  will 
consider  that  the  wheel  is  revolving  at  a  uniform  angular  velocity, 
and  also  neglect  the  time  that  it  takes  the  springs  to  act. 

Let  w  angle  made  by  K,  at  any  moment,  with  the  horizontal: 
as  before,  let 

F=the  centrifugal  tendency  of  the  wheel,  which  may  be  calcu- 
lated as  in  (5). 

This  force  acts  in  the  direction  of  the  radius  R,  and,  since  we 
assumed  that  h  grows  constantly,  and  the  weight  of  the  wheel  is 
constant,  F  is  a  constant  force.  Then  the  vertical  component  of 
this  force  is,  in  all  cases, 

F  sin  h  (15) 

If  a  unit  force,  or  load,  gives  a  deflection  of  the  spring  =  S, 
then  the  total  deflection  at  any  moment  is  equal  to  the  total  force 
acting  times  the  unit  deflection,  or 

FS  sin  h  (16) 

Let  this  be  represented  by  '<,  as  shown  on  the  figure,  then 
r)=FSsinfl  117) 

The  vertical  distance  of  the  center  of  gravity  of  the  wheel  from 
the  horizontal  axis  equals 

R  sin  H  +  .)  (18) 

Referring  to  the  horizontal  and  vertical  axes  as  co-ordinate 
axes, 

y  =  R  sin  <->  +  »  (19) 

Substituting  from  (17), 

y=R  sin  0  +FS  sin  8  (20) 

In  the  same  way,  the  horizontal  distance  of  the  same  point 
from  the  vertical  axis  is 

x  =  R  cos^  (21) 

When  tt-  900,  the  value  of  F  sin  H  reaches  a  maximum,  and 
equals  F.  At  that  point,  then,  the  greatest  deflection  of  the  springs 
will  occur,  and  will  equal  FS,  remembering  that  we  assumed  that 
the  time  of  action  of  the  springs  is  nil. 

To  judge  of  the  time  allowed  the  springs  for  action,  take  a 
driving-wheel  63  inches  in  diameter.  If  the  locomotive  move  at 
the  rate  of  40  miles  per  hour,  it  will  go  3,520  feet  per  minute.  The 
number  of  revolutions  per  minute  2134,  and  each  revolution 
would    take  .281    seconds.     Hut   in  half  a  revolution  the  force  has 


BAWDEN    COUNTERBALANCE  ON  LOCOMOTIVES.  57 

given   the  deflection  8  and  returned  to  its  normal  position,  so  that 
the  time  taken  in  deflection  and  recovery  is  only  .1405  seconds. 

Unwin  defines  a  suddenly  applied  load  as  a  load  applied  to  a 
structure  with6ut  velocity,  but  at  one  instant;  and  such  a  load,  not 
exceeding  the  elastic  limit,  produces  twice  the  stress  of  an  equal 
steady  load.  The  case  in  hand  comes  under  this  definition,  since, 
when  0=O°,  the  deflecting  force  is  o,  and  it  increases  with  the 
revolution.  In  the  locomotive,  flat  laminated  springs  are  used,  so 
that  the  formulae  for  beams  apply,  and  the  deflection  under  the  sud- 
denly applied  load  is  twice  that  which  would  occur  under  a  steady 
load,  or 

5=2''  (22) 

in  which  S1  is  the  deflection  under  the  same  load  acting  steadily. 

As  the  theoretical  curve  assumed  that  the  springs  took  no  time 
to  act,  while  we  should  naturally  expect  them  to  influence  the  move- 
ment because  of  the  resistance  which  they  offer,  it  was  determined 
to  investigate  their  action  to  some  degree. 

With  this  idea  in  view,  a  machine  as  shown  in  Fig.  4  was  con- 
structed, having,  as  in  the  theoretical  machine,  a  spindle  free  to  move 
vertically  while  revolving,  although  against  the  resistance  of  springs. 

The  machine  consists,  essentially,  of  a  wooden  frame,  braced, 
and  clamped  rigidly  to  the  bed  of  a  lathe.  Through  the  upper  and 
lower  cross-pieces  two  hollow  brass  rods  are  fitted  to  slide  verti- 
cally. To  these  rods  is  clamped  a  block,  carrying  a  spindle,  which 
has  at  one  end  a  rod  which  works  freely  in  a  slot  attached  to  the 
face-plate  of  the  lathe;  and  on  the  other  end  another  rod,  upon 
which  is  a  weight,  which  may  be  fastened  at  any  point,  in  order  to 
give  different  radii,  and  thus  different  centrifugal  forces  at  the  same 
speed. 

The  machine  has  proved  itself,  on  the  whole,  not  altogether 
satisfactory.  It  was  not  rigid  enough,  and  for  that  reason  the 
curves  are  not  as  satisfactory  as  might  be  desired.  The  centrifugal 
force  of  the  weight  combined  with  its  leverage  on  the  brass  rods 
tended  to  bend  them,  and  for  that  reason,  in  Fig.  6,  the  curve, 
which  should  always  remain  outside  of  the  circle,  passes  within. 
However,  the  machine  served  its  purpose  in  so  far  as  it  shows  that 
the  springs  do  retard  the  maximum,  so  that,  whereas  it  should  be  on 
the  vertical  axis,  it  is  carried  over,  in  some  cases  more  than  200. 
The  pencil  point  which  traced  the  curves  was  placed  at  the  center  of 
gravity  of  the  weight,  so  that  it  records  the  movements  of  the  weight. 


Sfl 


THE  Ti:<  IIXOGRAPH. 


Fig.  4. 


:::30e::d 


Scale  =  — . 


IS       X    i       J'     «     J  ®      0 


c^: 


^n 


/  %  \ 


A 


3. 


Fig.  4. 

The  method  of  obtaining  a  curve  was  as  follows:  A  drawing- 
board,  clamped  to  the  carriage  of  the  lathe,  and  with  a  sheet  of 
paper  stretched  upon  it,  was  moved  up  until  the  pencil  point 
touched  it.  Then  the  lathe  was  started  and  the  curve  traced;  and 
the  number  of  revolutions  per  minute  counted  by  means  of  a  speed 
indicator.  After  that,  the  carriage  was  run  back  and  the  radius  of 
the  center  of  gravity  of  the  weight  measured. 

Owing  to  the  fact  that  the  data  had  to  be  obtained  while  other 
machines  in    the    shop  were  being    used,  the    speed  of  revolution 


BA  )Vl)EN—COUNTEltliALANCE  ON  LOCOMOTIVES.  59 

varied  considerably  during  the  experiments,  and  in  all  probability 
the  speed  noted  is  not  exactly  the  same  speed  as  that  at  which  the 
curve  was  traced. 

The  springs  used  were  of  steel  wire,  B.  &  S.  Wire  Gauge  No. 
10.  Their  temper  proved  unsatisfactory  and  lacked  uniformity. 
The  weight  used  was  3.19  pounds.  In  the  machine  four  springs 
were  used,  two  on  each  brass  rod,  one  above  the  block,  and  the 
other  below,  in  each  case.  They  were  intended  to  be  exactly  alike, 
and  are  so  considered  in  the  calculations. 

To  calculate  the  strength  of  these  springs  and  the  theoretical 
deflections  under  the  various  loads  put  upon  them,  Reauleaux's 
formulse  for  spiral  springs  may  be  used,  which  are  as  follows: 


l=ni/(2  -  r)M-(pitch)2  (23) 

32  P  1  r8 

d= (24) 

-  GdJ 
In  the  case  of  this  machine  the  load  is  distributed  between  two 
springs  and  is  equal  to  the  centrifugal  force. 

Hence  P=^F  for  each  spring.  (25) 

The  data  obtained  from  the  machine  are  as  follows: 
Outside  diameter  of  coils  =  f  j1 
d  =  .ioi91 
Hence  2r=.74l 

r=-37' 
n  =  8 
pitch  =  ^1 
Whence  ')=. 022366  P  (26) 

The  following  table  gives  the  results  of  the  experiments,  show- 
ing the  different  loads  and  the  deflections  corresponding.  The 
notation  is  as  follows: 

r=  distance  of  center  of  gravity  of  the  weight  from  the  axis  of 
revolution,  in  inches, 

N=number  of  revolutions  per  minute, 

v=velocity  of  weight,  in  feet  per  second,  as  calculated  from 
2  -r  N 

the  formula:     v= 

12x60 
F=centrifugal  force  in  pounds,  as  calculated  from  (4): 

W.va 
F= 


60 


1  III:  YECHNOGRAFH. 


TOP 


I  i,. 


BAWDEN— COUNTERBALANCE  ON  LOCOMOTIVES.  61 


P=^F=load  on  each  spring,  as  in  (25), 

'1= theoretical  deflection  of  spring  in  inches,  and  equals. 022366  P 
as  in  (26), 

o0  =  observed  deflection  in  inches,  as  measured  on  Figures  5 
and  6, 

n  =  angle  at  which  maximum  occurs,  measured  to  the  right  of 
vertical  axis. 

The  first  column  gives  the  number  of  the  curve  as  given  on 
the  Figures  5  and  6. 


Fie.  6. 


I  III.    TECHNOGRAPH. 
TABLE  OF    RESULTS. 


So 
l 

r. 

N. 

V. 

F. 

1". 

<> 

< 

0 

n. 

2  41    272 

5.720 

16  14 

807    1P1 

■23 

21.5° 

4 

359    *5* 

7  895 

20.64 

10  32    2\\ 

;- 

19^ 

s- 

4  3"    256 

9.629 

12  78  .286 

>4 

17. 5° 

6. 

5.81    264 

1338S 

36.66 

18.33    4>o 

65 

17. 5° 

; 

05<)    264 

'5  183 

45  5  s 

20.79    465 

7" 

16° 

i 

• 

9  254 

42.24 

21    12  .472 

42 

19O 

2. 

3   '6 

440 

12  134 

55  39 

27  69 

619 

55 

22° 

It  will  be  noticed  that  the  deflections,  as  observed  on  the 
curves,  do  not  correspond  to  the  theoretical  deflections.  A  possi- 
ble reason  for  this,  is  that  the  springs  for  Fig.  6  are  a  different  set 
from  those  used  in  Fig.  5,  and  they  began  to  take  a  set,  which 
increased  with  the  pressure  upon  them,  until  in  No.  7  the  springs 
were  about  /-,'  shorter  than  when  they  were  put  into  the  machine. 
That  made  about  l/A.x  of  lost  motion  between  the  two  springs,  in 
which  space  the  weight  had  no  resistance  from  the  springs. 

As  has  been  said  before,  these  sources  of  error  serve  to  render 
the  results  satisfactory,  only  in  so  far  as  they  serve  as  suggestions 
for  further  investigation. 

As  the  effect  of  the  centrifugal  force  of  the  excess  of  counter- 
balance increases  with  the  speed,  the  lifting  effect  must  increase. 
The  force  exerted  in  the  cylinder  by  the  steam,  transmitted  through 
the  rods  to  the  crank-pin  of  the  wheel  can  be  found;  and  thence 
the  force  tending  to  rotate  the  wheel,  considered  as  acting  at  the 
circumference  of  the  wheel,  where  it  rests  on  the  rail.  This  force 
can  be  found  for  any  point  in  the  revolution,  and  for  the  same 
point  the  weight  on  the  rail  may  be  found,  this  last  varying,  of 
course,  with  the  direction  and  amount  of  the  centrifugal  force. 
Thus,  having  found,  for  any  point  in  a  revolution,  the  rotative  force 
at  the  rail  and  the  weight  on  the  rail,  the  ratio  between  them  is 
easily  determined,  which  we  may  call  the  coefficient  of  slip. 

Now,  the  ratio  of  the  force  applied  horizontally  at  the  rail, 
and  which  will  just  produce  slipping,  to  the  weight  on  the  rail,  is 
called  the  coefficient  of  friction  or  adhesion.  Values  for  this  co- 
efficient are  given  by  Haswell,  and  vary,  according  to  the  condi- 
tion of  the  rail,  from  .09  to  .$$. 

Mr.  J.  N.  Rarr  discusses  in  the  Railroad  Gazette  (February  6, 
1891,  p.  <)2),  the  relations  between  the  co-efficient  of  slip  and  the 
co-efficient  of  adhesion,  and  finds,  experimentally,  that  the  former 


PEA  BODY— PRINTS  FROM  ETCHED  METALS.  63 

does  exceed  the  latter  at  times,  and  summarizes  his  conclusions  as 
follows: 

"i.  Flat  places  on  driving-wheel  tires  are  not  entirely  due  to 
lack  of  uniformity  in  the  wearing  quality  of  the  same. 

2.  The  flat  places  have  a  tendency  to  group  themselves  where 
the  co-efficient  of  slip  is  the  greatest. 

3.  They  vary  in  depth  with  the  pressure  on  the  rail,  and  when 
the  pressure  does  not  exceed  11,000  pounds,  the  imperceptible  slip 
produces  but  little  abrasion. 

4.  Imperceptible  slip  does  not  appear  at  random  on  any  part 
of  the  wheel,  but  in  special  localities  as  fixed  by  the  maximum  val- 
ues of  the  co-efficient  of  slip. 

5.  The  counterbalance  should  be  made  as  light  as  possible, 
consistent  with  smooth  riding. 

6.  The  weight  of  the  reciprocating  parts  should  be  as  light  as 
possible." 

These  conclusions  were  drawn  from  experiments  on  an  engine 
going  at  the  rate  of  40  miles  an  hour.  Others  have  called  atten- 
tion to  the  fact  that  these  spots  have  a  tendency  to  group  them- 
selves at  corresponding  points  on  the  wheels  of  a  locomotive. 

However,  the  data  are  so  meager  that  it  would  be  foolish  to 
state  that  any  given  spot  was  caused  by  any  certain  action.  But 
may  it  not  be  assumed  in  the  light  of  the  imperfect  experiments 
just  described,  that  the  centrifugal  force  of  the  excess  of  counter- 
balance, taken  in  connection  with  the  driving-springs  of  the  loco- 
motive, has  considerable  to  do  with  the  location  of  the  worn  places 
in  the  tires? 


PRINTS  FROM  ETCHED  METALS. 

By  L.  \V.  Peabody,  '91. 

The  specimen  to  be  etched  must  present  a  perfectly  smooth 
plane  surface  on  the  side  from  which  the  print  is  desired.  The  re- 
quisite finish  may  be  secured  after  the  piece  leaves  the  machine  by 
a  careful  use  of  a  file  and  emery  paper,  care  being  taken  to  remove 
all  file  or  other  tool  marks,  as  these  will  appear  in  the  prints. 

It  will  be  a  matter  of  great  convenience  to  have  the  side  op- 
posite the  etching  surface  parallel  with  it.  Yet  if  the  specimen  is  of 
considerable  size  this  is  not  absolutely  necessary,  as  the  uneven  side 
may  be  blocked  up  with  wood  or  other  material  for  the  press. 
-5 


t.i  I  III.   I'ECHNOGSAPU. 

However,  the  former  method  will  be  found  more  satisfactory.  When 
the  surface  is  sufficiently  polished,  it  should  be  suspended  face 
downward  in  a  shallow  dish  containing  the  etching  fluid;  but  should 
never  touch  the  bottom  so  as  to  prevent  free  access  of  the  acid. 
The  specimen  may  be  held  by  any  suitable  clamp  which  will  over- 
lap the  edges  of  the  containing  vessel  thus  forming  a  support. 

( Onsiderable  range  is  permissible  in  the  proportions  of  the 
etching  tluid.  Hither  of  the  following  volumetric  proportions  have 
been  found  good  in  practice. 

H2  S  04 (con.) 3  parts. 

H  CI "     i      " 

HaO 9      " 

H,  S04 (con.) i      " 

11    0 3      " 

The  length  of  time  that  the  metal  should  be  immersed  is  largely 
a  matter  of  experience,  as  the  acid  acts  on  no  two  pieces  with  the 
same  rapidity.  The  operator  must  examine  the  specimen  from  time 
to  time  to  determine  when  the  desired  end  is  reached.  The  metal 
must  remain  in  the  acid  until  the  etching  surface  when  covered  with 
printers  ink  will  give  a  good  impression.  Practice  and  judgment 
will  determine  this  point. 

When  the  action  is  complete  all  acid  must  be  washed  from  the 
specimen  and  the  etched  surface  dried  immediately  to  prevent 
rusting.  This  may  be  done  by  placing  in  hot  water  for  a  short 
time,  the  heat  being  quite  sufficient  to   dry  the  surface  on  removal. 

Ordinary  printers'  ink  is  used  exclusively  in  making  prints. 
This  should  be  spread  in  a  thin,  even  coat  over  a  fiat  piece  of 
marble  or  glass.  A  common  printer's  roller  is  used  to  ink  the 
etched  surface.  This  requires  considerable  care,  as  the  ink  must 
be  spread  evenly  over  the  entire  surface.  Pass  the  roller  over  the 
slab  and  etching  alternately  for  each  print.  No  deviation  from  this 
will  insure  good  results.  After  the  specimen  is  inked  it  is  ready  for 
the  press.  For  small  and  medium  sized  pieces  an  ordinary  copying 
press  can  be  used.  Place  either  a  thin  piece  of  soft  rubber  or  a 
couple  of  blotters  on  a  plane,  smooth  board,  and  over  these  a  white 
sheet  of  moistened  paper.  The  specimen  should  now  be  placed 
face  downward  upon  the  white  paper,  and  the  whole  placed  in  the 
press.  If  the  top  is  parallel  with  the  etched  surface,  place  a  sheet 
of  rubber  or  blotters  on  the  top  and  subject  to  a  pressure  of  about 
500  lbs.  per  square  inch.       If  the  top  is  irregular  it  may  be  built  up 


LiOYD-ELECTRIC  S THEE T  RA ILWAT  PLA N T.  65 

and  covered  with   a  board,  when  the  sheet  of  rubber  is  used  as 
before. 

After  use  the  etching  plate  should  be  thoroughly  cleaned,  dried, 
and  coated  with  vaseline  to  avoid  all  rusting. 


NOTES  ON  AN  ELECTRIC  STREET  RAILWAY  PLANT. 
By  W.  A.  Boyd,  '91. 

Tests  were  made  on  an  electric  street  railway  plant,  consisting 
of  an  80  horse-power  Ideal  engine,  making  250  revolutions  per 
minute,  driving  a  United  States  dynamo  of  40,000  Watts  capacity. 
The  method  of  driving  is  by  friction  belts  between  the  pulleys. 
The  engine  pulley  is  six  feet  in  diameter,  and  the  dynamo  pulley 
about  three  feet.  Four  belts,  4^  inches  wide,  cover  the  circum- 
ference of  the  dynamo  pulley.  These  are  prevented  from  coming 
off  by  flanges  on  the  pulley.  The  pressure  between  the  pulleys  is 
maintained  by  a  screw  on  the  sliding  frame  of  the  dynamo. 

This  plant  furnishes  power  for  about  two  miles  of  street  car 
track  between  the  cities  of  Champaign  and  Urbana,  111.  Also  power 
for  two  small  motors  and  about  one  hundred  incandescent  lights. 
Ordinarily  two  motor  cars,  carrying  motors  of  twenty  nominal 
horse-power  each,  are  run.  For  additional  traffic  trailers  and  more 
motor  cars  are  added. 

Ten  tests  of  this  plant  were  made,  each  test  lasting  twenty 
minutes,  this  being  the  length  of  one  complete  trip.  The  tests  were 
begun  when  the  cars  were  at  the  end  of  the  line.  Indicator  cards 
were  taken  each  minute  during  the  test.  During  this  time  speed 
indicators  were  run  continuously  from  the  engine  and  dynamo 
shafts.  The  speed  of  the  engine,  while  taking  a  card,  was  read  from 
a  tachometer. 

In  the  morning,  between  the  hours  of  9  and  12,  the  power  re- 
quired varied  from  9.1  to  54.6  horse-power.  The  average  for  the 
time,  while  running  two  cars  only,  was  20.7  horse-power.  In  the 
afternoon,  between  the  hours  of  2  and  5,  the  power  ranged  from 
1 1.5  to  55.23  horse-power.  The  average  power  required  during  the 
time  was  21.07  horse-power.  The  average  power  required  for  the 
day  was  20.88  horse-power. 

To  determine  the  frictional  loss  due  to  increased  pressure  on 
the    bearings,   successive   positions    of    the   tightener   screw   were 


66  THE    TECHNOGRAPB 

arranged,  advancing  the  dynamo  by  ^nds  of  an  inch.  Table  I. 
gives  the  average  of  a  number  of  cards  taken  at  these  positions. 
Of  these  positions  Nos.  1-5  are  below  the  limit  for  ordinary  run- 
ning, and  No.  10  is  above  the  limit  for  cool  bearings.  Table  II.  gives 
another  set  of  values  taken  at  a  later  time  for  positions  advancing 
the  dynamo  by  64ths  of  an  inch.  The  positions,  1-4  in  the  second 
set,  lie  between  6  and  8  in  the  first  set.  They  show  a  slight  in- 
crease in  engine  friction,  but  a  decided  decrease  in  the  total  fric- 
tion. 

To  determine  the  velocity  ratio  of  driver  and  follower,  continu- 
ous readings  were  taken  from  both  while  running  light.  The  value 
thus  obtained  was  compared  with  the  values  for  different  positions, 
obtained  when  running  cars,  and  the  per  cent  slip  calculated  for 
these  positions.  These  results  are  given  in  Table  III.,  together 
with  the  mechanical  losses  due  to  friction.  An  examination  of  this 
table  shows  that  for  all  powers  under  30  horse-power  the  total  sum 
of  frictional  losses  and  losses  due  to  slip  is  a  minimum  for  the  loose 
position;  while  for  powers  greater  than  30  the  most  economical 
point  is  at  the  tighter  positions. 

In  order  to  obtain  the  pressure  on  the  bearings  in  this  case,  a 
lever  48  inches  long  was  bolted  to  the  tightener  wheel,  and  the  pull 
required  read  from  a  spring  balance.  By  several  trials  the  pull  re- 
quired to  move  the  dynamo  on  its  frame  alone  was  14  pounds.  The 
pull  required  to  move  the  dynamo  while  in  running  position  was 
2oy2  pounds.  The  mean  radius  of  the  screw  was  .6887  inches,  and 
the  pitch  yx  of  an  inch.  Using  .15  as  the  co-efficient  of  friction, 
the  pressure  on  the  bearings  was  found  to  be  2,160  pounds. 

As  a  comparison  between  this  system  of  driving  and  driving  by 
means  of  belting,  a  calculation  was  made  taking  as  an  extreme  case 
the  distance  between  driver  and  follower  equal  to  one  inch.  Using 
the  ordinary  formulae  ior  belting,  the  pressure  on  the  bearings  nec- 
essary to  transmit  the  maximum  power  was  found  to  be  S84  pounds. 
This  gives  the  pressure  on  the  bearings  but  little  more  than  two- 
fifths  of  the  pressure  required  by  the  present  method  of  driving. 
The  width  of  the  belt  taking  into  consideration  centrifugal  action 
was  calculated  and  found  to  be  ten  inches  for  a  one-quarter  inch 
belt. 

These  results  seem  to  show  that  for  street  railway  work,  or 
where  the  demands  lor  power  vary  so  much,  the  ordinary  belt  driv- 
ing is  superior  in  economy  to  driving  direct  by  means  of  friction 
pulleys. 


LIME-CEMENT  MORTAL'. 
Table  I. 


67 


Engine. 

Dynamo  and  Engine  Friction. 

I 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

3-°47 

4.318 

4-583 

4774 

4.71 

4.871 

4.418 

5  184 

5-705 

5-831 

6.498 

Table  II. 

Engine. 


3-312 


Dynamo  and  Engine  Friction. 


3-77 


4327 


4619 


4-338 


Table  III. 


Set. 

Posi- 
tion. 

I.  H.  P. 

Eng.  friction. 

H.  P.  Trans. 

Slip  per  cent. 

Mech.  loss 
H.  P. 

1 

2 
3 
4 
5 
6 

4 
4 
3 
3 
2 
1 

20.036 

19875 

19.549 

19.45 

28.92 

29.01 

3312 
3312 
3  312 
3  312 
3-312 
3-312 

16.724 
16.563 
16.237 
16.138 
25.608 
25.698 

■38 

•383 

•85 

I-387 

i-555 

3.087 

1.522 
1.522 

1  307 
1.307 
1. 015 

•458 

LIME-CEMENT  MORTAR. 

It  is  common  practice,  particularly  in  the  construction  of  large 
buildings,  to  add  hydraulic  cement  to  lime  mortar,  on  the  supposi- 
tion that  the  cement  gives  additional  strength.  Gen.  Gilmore,  in 
his  "Practical  Treaties  on  Limes,  Hydraulic  Cements,  and  Mortars," 
says:  "Most  American  cements  will  sustain,  without  any  great  loss 
of  strength,  a  dose  of  lime  paste  equal  to  that  of  the  cement  paste; 
while  a  dose  equal  to  half  to  three-quarters  of  the  volume  of  cement 
paste  may  safely  be  added  to  any  energetic  Rosendale  cement,  with- 
out producing  deterioration  in  the  quality  of  the  mortar,  to  a  degree 
requiring  any  serious  consideration."  In  order  to  test  these  con- 
clusions the  four  series  of  experiments  described  below  were  made. 

For  the  sake  of  brevity  the  conditions  common  to  all  the  series 
are  described  here  once  for  all. 


r,-  Till.   TECHHOGRAPH. 

The  lime  employed  was  a  good  quality  of  ordinary  fat  lime. 
It  was  slaked  in  an  earthen  jar  at  least  two  days  before  being 
used.  The  proportion  of  water  added  to  the  dry  lime  in  slaking 
was  a  little  more  than  two  to  one  by  weight.  The  lime  paste  was 
kept  at  a  constant  consistency  by  weighing  the  jar  each  day  and 
adding  water  to  make  up  for  the  loss  by  evaporation. 

Two  kinds  of  hydraulic  cement  was  tried,  a  German  Portland 
and  Black  Diamond  Louisville  (Ky.)  Rosendale.  The  usual  tests 
for  soundness  showed  both  cements  good  in  this  respect.  The 
following  results  were  obtained  for  fineness: 

PORTLAND.  ROSENDALE. 

Retained  on  a  No.    50  sieve 1  per  cent.  15  per  cent. 

Retained  on  a  No.    75  sieve   7         "  9         " 

Retained  on  a  No.  100  sieve 7         "  4         " 

Passing  a  No.  100 85        "  72 

The  following  results  for  tensile   strength  were  obtained   from 

briquettes  stored  in  air: 

Pounds  per  Square  Inch, 

portland.  rosendale. 

When    7  days  old 150  75 

When  21  days  old 300 

When  28  days  old 320  225 

When  70  days  old 360  250 

The  sand  used  was  such  as  passed  a  No.  18  sieve  and  was 
caught  on  a  No.  30  sieve,  and  was  therefore  practically  "standard 
sand,"  as  recommended  by  the  committee  of  the  American  Society 
of  Civil  Engineers.  It  was  fairly  sharp,  and  contained  a  large  per 
cent  of  silica.  It  was  thorougly  washed  and  dried  before  being 
used. 

The  mortar  in  all  cases  consisted  of  two  volumes  of  sand  to 
one  of  the  lime-cement  paste.  The  weight  of  a  unit  of  volume 
of  each  ingredient  was  first  determined,  and  the  proportions  were 
then  adjusted  by  weighing.  The  cement  and  the  sand  were  thor- 
oughly mixed  dry,  the  lime  was  then  added  and  all  well  mixed,  and 
finally  enough  water  was  added  to  bring  the  mass  to  a  proper  con- 
sistency. Since  lime  will  not  harden  under  water  all  the  specimens 
were  stored  in  the  air. 

The  breaking  was  done  on  a  home-made  cement  testing  ma- 
chine giving  results  accurate  to  half  pounds  for  light  pulls,  anil 
correct  to  two  pounds  for  the  greater  pulls.  The  machine  was  so 
arranged  as  to  give  a  central  pull  upon  the  test  specimen. 


EIDMA  NN-LIME-  GEM  EX  T  MOR  TA  li. 


COHESIVE  STRENGTH  OF  LIME  AND  LOUISVILLE  CEMENT  MORTAR. 
By  E.  C.   Eidmann,  '91. 

The  mortar  was  put  into  the  molds  by  hand  with  as  nearly  the 
same  pressure  as  possible,  and  remained  in  the  molds  twenty-two 
hours.  In  determining  the  strength  of  a  mortar  of  any  particular 
age  at  least  five  briquettes,  representing  two  or  more  moldings, 
were  broken  and  an  average  taken. 

Figure  1  gives  the  strength  of  the  different  mortars  at  various 
ages.  It  will  be  noticed  that  the  strength  of  some  mortars  are 
shown  as  being  greater  than  others  at  a  succeeding  age.  In  these 
cases  the  briquettes  are  of  different  moldings.  Owing  to  the  differ- 
ent conditions  of  the  atmosphere  and  the  inexperience  of  the 
experimenter,  the  moldings  might  not  have  been  made  exactly  the 
same.  In  all  mortars  over  seven  days  old,  the  20  per  cent  cement 
and  80  per  cent  lime  mortar  is  weaker  than  all  lime;  but  as  soon  as 
more  cement  is  added,  say  30  per  cent,  a  greater  strength  than  all 
lime  is  produced. 

50[ 


Fig. 


Cohesive  Strength  of  Louisville  Cement  and  Lime 
Mortar. 


Notice  that  the  60  per  cent  mortar  is  but  little,  if  any,  stronger 
than  that  containing  only  30  per  cent  of  cement;  and  hence,  if  it  is 
not  desirable  to  use  more  than  60  per  cent  of  cement,  it  is  not  eco- 
nomical to  use  more  than  30.  Notice  that  the  30  per  cent  cement 
mortar  when  four  days  old  is  nearly  50  per  cent  stronger  than  the 
all  lime  mortar,  but  that  the  difference  in  strength  steadily  decreases 
until  at  84  days   old   the  all  lime  mortar  is   stronger  or  at  least 


70  THE  TECHNOGR  if II 

equally  as  strong.  As  in  most  cases  it  matters  little  whether  the 
strength  is  obtained  in  a  few  days  or  not,  it  is  best,  and  by  far  the 
cheapest,  to  use  all  lime  in  these  cases  rather  than  put  in  as  high  as 
even  60  per  cent  of  the  cement.  According  to  the  diagram  the 
mortar  containing  20  per  cent  of  cement  and  80  per  cent  of  lime 
is  not  so  strong  as  all  lime. 

Concerning  the  addition  of  small  per  cents  of  lime  to  cement 
mortar  the  diagram  gives  no  very  definite  conclusions.  Apparently 
a  small  per  cent  of  lime  decreases  the  strength  of  the  mortar  in  a 
greater  ratio  than  the  proportion  of  the  lime  added;  and  conse- 
quently the  addition  of  small  per  cents  of  lime  to  cement  mortar  is 
not  economical,  at  least  as  far  as  the  strength  is  concerned.  Of 
course  the  addition  of  lime  to  cement  mortar  will  decrease  the 
activity  of  the  latter,  but  this  phase  of  the  subject  is  not  now  under 
consideration. 

COHESIVE  STRENGTH  OF  PORTLAND  CEMENT  AND  LIME  MORTAR- 
By  Chas.  D.  Vail,  '91. 

The  briquettes  were  put  into  the  molds  by  hand.  Although 
great  care  was  taken  to  give  them  uniform  pressure,  this  must  have 
been  the  source  of  greatest  error. 

Fig.  2  represents  graphically  the  results  obtained  from  the  ex- 
periments. All  points  in  the  curves  of  the  diagram  are  the  mean 
of  five  briquettes. 

In  the  diagram  it  will  be  noticed  that  the  relative  proportions 
of  lime  and  cement  vary  regularly,  except  the  90  per  cent  and  30  per 
cent  cement.  The  first  was  put  in  to  test  the  reliability  of  the  claim 
that  a  small  per  cent  of  lime  in  cement  mortar  does  not  seriously 
injure  it.  This  statement  is  made  by  Gen.  Gilmore,  and  appears  to 
be  supported  by  Mr.  Kinkead's  experiments.*  From  Fig.  2  we  see 
that  20  per  cent  of  lime  in  cement  mortar  weakens  it,  but  that  with 
10  per  cent  of  lime  the  mortar  seems  to  be  fully  as  strong  as  100  per 
cent  cement  mortar. 

As  to  adding  cement  to  lime  mortar  the  experiments  show  con- 
clusively that  it  is  not  economical,  because  the  strength  is  not 
noticeably  increased  until  40  per  cent  of  cement  is  added. 

The  conclusions  drawn  from  the  experiments  are:  (1)  The  ad- 
dition of  lime  to  cement  mortar,  up  to  15  per  cent,  does  not  injure 
the  mortar;  but  with  the  addition  of  more  than  this  the  strength 


1   "Selected  Papers  of  the  Civil  Engineers'  l'm\  crsity  of  Illinois." 


ENO-LIME-CEMENT  MORTAK. 


71 


+  7     /f-    zi     z&  *2  se 

Cls\e    in,    tlum 

Fig.  2.     Cohesive    Strength   of    Portland   Cement    and  Lime 

Mortar. 

decreases  more  rapidly  than  the  cost.  (2)  The  addition  of  cement, 
up  to  40  per  cent,  to  lime  mortar  is  not  wise,  because  first  it  does 
not  noticeably  increase  the  strength,  and  second  it  greatly  increases 
the  cost. 


ADHESIVE  STRENGTH  OF  LIME  AND  LOUISVILLE  CEMENT 

MORTAR. 

By  F.  H.  Eno,  '91. 

The  method  of  making  the  tests  consisted  in  cementing  two 

brick  together  cross-wise,  with  their  broad  faces  in  contact;  and 

then  measuring  the  force  required  to  pull  them  apart. 


72 


THE  TECHNOGBAPH. 


Before  being  used,  the  brick  were  immersed  in  water  about  30 
minutes,  when  they  were  taken  out  and  cemented  together  immedi- 
ately after  the  water  had  dripped  from  their  surfaces.  The  mortar 
was  carefully  put  on  one  brick  and  the  other  brick  placed  cross- 
wise on  it,  and  given  considerable  pressure  and  at  the  same  time  a 
twisting  motion  which  helped  to  exclude  the  air  and  make  a  better 
bed  for  the  top  brick.  The  attempt  was  made  to  use  as  nearly  as 
possible  the  same  pressure  a  mason  would  use  if  laying  the  brick  in 
a  wall.  They  were  left  to  set,  in  the  air,  under  the  weight  of  an 
additional  brick.  As  the  brick  averaged  a  tritle  over  4'j  pounds 
each  this  made  the  weight  on  the  mortar  joint  about  9  pounds. 
The  brick  were  hand-molded  and  moderately  smooth.  No  appre- 
ciable difference  in  the  adhesion  of  the  mortar  to  the  rough  and 
smooth  sides  of  the  brick  was  detected. 

The  testing  machine  was  so  arranged  as  to  certainly  bring  the 
pull  perpendicular  to  the  face  of  the  mortar  joint. 

Fig.  3  represents  graphically  the  results  obtained  from  this 
series  of  experiments.  The  numbers  on  the  plotted  lines  show  the 
per  cent  of  cement  in  the  cementitious  material.  The  results  as 
plotted  are  the  mean  of  at  least  five  experiments.  Tests  were 
made  daily  for  the  first  seven  days;  but  were  not  plotted  for  lack  of 
room.     In  all  about  800  experiments  were  made. 


Fig.  3. 


Adhesive    Strength  of    Louisville   Cement   \m>  Lime 

Mortar. 


The  diagram  shows  very  clearly  that  to  add  from  10  to  20  per 
cent  of  lime  paste  to  cement  mortar  does  not  materially  affect  its 
ultimate  strength.  The  substitution  of  10  per  cent  lime  saves  2.5 
per  cent  of  the   cost  of  the  original  cement,  while  the  substitution 


FREDERICKSON—LIUE-Ci:Ui:ST  MORTAR.  73 

of  20  per  cent  of  lime  saves  5.0  per  cent;  while  the  cost  of  the  lime 
thus  substituted  is  scarcely  appreciable.  Notice  that  the  addition 
of  more  than  20  per  cent  of  lime  paste  to  cement  mortar  very 
materially  reduces  the  strength.  Therefore  we  draw  the  conclusion 
that  it  is  economical  to  add  not  more  than  20  per  cent  of  lime  paste 
to  cement  mortar.  This  only  partially  sustains  Gen.  Gilmore's 
statement  referred  to  in  the  first  paragraph  of  article  (page  67). 

An  examination  of  Fig.  3  shows  that  a  mortar  containing  20 
per  cent  of  cement  and  80  per  cent  lime  paste  is  weaker  than  an  all- 
lime  mortar.  Therefore  the  substitution  of  10  or  20  per  cent  of 
cement  in  a  lime  mortar  for  an  equal  volume  of  lime  paste  de- 
creases the  strength  and  at  the  same  time  increases  the  cost.  Hence 
this  practice  is  decidedly  uneconomical — at  least  as  far  as  strength 
is  concerned. 

With  all  the  mortars,  it  was  found  that  after  having  gained 
some  age  the  adhesion  to  the  brick  was  greater  than  the  cohesion 
between  the  particles  of  the  mortar.  For  example,  for  the  first  7 
days,  in  73  per  cent  of  the  tests  the  adhesion  was  weaker  than  the 
cohesion;  while  for  the  remaining  time,  in  only  14  per  cent  of  the 
tests  was  the  adhesion  the  weaker. 

In  conclusion  it  may  be  well  to  state  that  the  results  obtained 
for  the  adhesion  to  the  brick  and  by  cohesion  in  the  briquettes  can 
be  compared  only  relatively,  since  the  mortar  was  compacted  dif- 
ferently in  the  molds  than  it  was  between  the  brick  and  was  subject 
to  various  other  differences. 


ADHESIVE  STRENGTH  OF  PORTLAND  CEMENT  AND  LIME  MORTAR. 
By  T.  H.  Frederickson,  '91. 

The  experiments  were  made  with  German  Portland  cement  and 
lime  mortar  and  brick,  in  the  same  manner  and  subject  to  the  same 
conditions  as  described  above  by  Mr.  Eno. 

Although  the  tests  were  made  to  obtain  the  adhesive  strength 
of  the  mortar  to  brick,  the  mortars  consisting  of  40,  20,  10,  o  per 
cents  of  lime  and  60,  80,  90,  100  per  cents  of  Portland  cement  re- 
spectively, separated  from  the  brick  through  failure  of  adhesion; 
while  the  mortars  consisting  of  60,  80,  90,  100  per  cents  of  lime 
and  40,  20,  10,  o  per  cents  of  cement  respectively  gave  results  for 
the  cohesive  strength  (except  in  first  3  to  7  days,  when  adhesion 
was  the  greater).     Or  in  other  words,  with  the  mortar  in  which  the 


74 


THE  TECHNOGRAPH. 


lime  predominates  separation  is  through  the  failure  of  cohesion,  and 
with  the  mortar  in  which  the  cement  is  in  excess  the  separation  is 
due  to  the  failure  of  adhesion. 

Fig.  4  shows  graphically  the  relative  and  absolute  strength,  at 
various  ages,  of  mortars  composed  of  different  per  cents  of  lime  and 
Portland  cement. 


0-4  7       I*      21       2i      35      «      41     Jb 

-Hoe     in    daus 


Fig.  .}.     Adhesive    Strength  of   Portland   Cement   and    Lime 

Mortar. 

From  the  diagram  it  is  seen  that  the  strength  of  the  mortars 
containing  the  8o,  90,  and  100  per  cents  of  the  cement  are  prac- 
tically the  same,  which  would  seem  to  show  that  the  addition  of  a 
little  lime  to  cement  mortar  does  not  materially  decrease  the 
strength.  Notice  that  the  mortar  containing  only  60  per  cent  of 
cement  is  considerably  weaker  than  that  containing  80  per  cent, 
which  shows  that  more  than  20  per  cent  of  lime  causes  a  consider- 
able decrease  of  strength.  A  study  of  the  lower  portion  of  the  dia- 
L'l.im  show,  that  10  per  cent  of  cement  added  to  lime  mortar  does 
not  materially  increase  its  strength. 


FREDERICKSON- LIME-CEMENT  MORTA  R. 


75 


Table  i  was  derived  from  the  diagram,  and  shows  approxi- 
mately the  effect  of  introducing  each  additional  per  cent  of  cement 
into  lime-cement  mortar.  The  values  for  the  strength  were  those  of 
the  8-16  weeks'  tests,  when  the  ultimate  strength  seems  to  have 
been  attained. 

TABLE  1. 

INCREASE     IN     COST    AND     STRENGTH    BY     SUCCESSIVE    ADDITIONS      OF 
CEMENT  TO  LIME  MORTAR. 


100 
0 

90 
10 

80 
20 

60 
40 

40 
60 

20 
80 

2.25 
239 

■95 

10 
90 

Per  cent  of  cement 

100 

Successive  increase  in  strength. 
Successive  increase  in  cost.  . . . 

I 
I 
I 

.2 

•7 
.28 

■56 
1 .  n 

5i 

1 .21 

1.68 
•7 

1.62 

2. 14 
•75 

2.40 

2.49 

•97 

2.41 

2  50 

.96 

This  table  shows  that  all-lime  mortar  is  perhaps  the  most  efficient 
mortar,  when  great  strength  is  not  required  and  water  is  not  encoun- 
tered; otherwise  the  high  per  cents  of  cement  mortars  are  unneces- 
sary and  practically  as  efficient. 

Taking  the  prices  of  cement  and  lime  at  Chicago,  i.  e.,  cement 
@  #3.25  per  bbl.  of  400  lbs.,  or  o  8  cents  per  lb.,  and  lime  @  60 
cents  per  bbl.  of  200  lbs.,  or  0.3  cents  per  lb  ,  the  relative  and  abso- 
lute cost  of  equal  volumes  of  cementitious  material  in  the  various 
mortars  is  as  in  Table  2. 


TABLE  2. 

COST,  STRENGTH,  AND  EFFICIENCY  OF  THE  SEVERAL  MORTARS. 


c 

ementitious  Mater 

al. 

Mortar. 

Composition    in 
per  cents. 

*Cost  per  Cubic  Yard  of  Mortar. 

Strength. 

O      -  fD    P 

Pounds 

<"    3    3    £■. 

Lime. 

Cement. 

Lime. 

Cement. 

Total. 

Rel'tive. 

p'rsq.in. 

Rel'tive. 

0 

100 

$1 .00 

$7.46 

$7-46 

1 .00 

85 

1 .00 

I  .OO 

10 

90 

.  10 

6 

71 

6.81 

91 

84 

98 

I  .09 

20 

80 

.20 

5 

97 

6.17 

82 

78 

92 

III 

40 

60 

.40 

4 

48 

4.88 

6S 

48 

57 

.86 

60 

40 

.60 

2 

98 

3-58 

48 

35 

41 

•85 

80 

20 

.80 

I 

49 

2.29 

3i 

20 

24 

.76 

90 

10 

.90 

75 

1.65 

22 

14 

ib 

74 

100 

0 

1 .00 

OO 

1 .00 

13 

12 

15 

1  05 

*Cost  of  sand  not  included. 


I  III.    FECHNOGRAPH. 

In  a  cubic  yard  of  brick  masonry,  containing  500  brick  (8^  x  4 
laid  with  <4  to  ;  -inch  joints,  there  are  10,000  cubic  inches  of 
mortar.  It  was  found  that  about  160  pounds  of  Portland  cement 
was  required  to  produce  this  amount  of  mortar.  The  cost  of  the 
cement,  at  0.8  cents  per  pound,  was  $1.28.  Had  20  per  cent  of 
lime  been  used  with  the  cement,  a  mortar  nearly  as  strong  and  one 
not  so  apt  to  set  before  being  used,  would  have  been  obtained  at  a 
saving  of  25  cents.  That  is  to  say,  by  the  addition  of  2  or  3  cents 
worth  of  lime  18  cents  worth  of  cement  would  have  been  saved. 

The  additions  of  small  per  cents  of  cements  to  lime  mortar 
may  slightly  quicken  the  activity,  and  certainly  does  cause  the 
mortar  to  work  better;  but  we  could  not,  for  these  reasons  alone, 
recommend  this  practice,  since,  while  the  cement  does  add  slightly 
to  the  strength,  the  increased  cost  is  such  as  to  render  the  practice 
unprofitable.  Small  per  cents  of  lime,  up  to  25  per  cent,  may  be 
added  to  cement  mortar  without  materially  weakening  it,  while  at 
the  same  time  considerably  diminishing  the  cost,  and  also  retard- 
ing the  activity,  thereby  allowing  the  mason  sufficient  time  to  place 
the  mortars  before  it  begins  to  set. 


TALBOT—  RAILWAY  TRANSITION  CURVES.  77 

RAILWAY  TRANSITION  CURVES. 

By  Arthur  N.  Talbot,  Professor  of  Municipal  Engineering. 

A  transition  curve,  or  easement  curve,  as  it  is  sometimes  called, 
is  a  curve  of  varying  radius  used  to  connect  circular  curves  with 
tangents  for  the  purpose  of  avoiding  the  shock  and  disagreeable 
lurch  of  trains,  due  to  the  instant  change  of  direction  and  also  to 
the  sudden  change  from  level  to  inclined  track.  The  primary  object 
of  the  transition  curve,  then,  is  to  effect  smooth  riding  when  the 
train  is  entering  or  leaving  a  curve. 

The  generally  accepted  requirement  for  a  proper  transition 
curve  is  that  the  degree-of-curve  shall  increase  gradually  and  uni- 
formly from  the  point  of  tangent  until  the  degree  of  the  main  curve 
is  reached,  and  that  the  super-elevation  shall  increase  uniformly 
from  zero  at  the  tangent  to  the  full  amount  at  the  connection  with 
the  main  curve  and  yet  have  at  any  point  the  appropriate  super- 
elevation for  the  curvature.  In  addition  to  this,  an  acceptable 
transition  curve  must  be  so  simple  that  the  field  work  may  be  easily 
and  rapidly  done,  and  should  be  so  flexible  that  it  may  be  adjusted 
to  meet  the  varied  requirements  of  problems  in  location  and  con- 
struction. 

Without  attempting  to  show  the  necessity  or  the  utility  of  tran- 
sition curves,  this  paper  will  consider  some  forms  of  such  curves, 
and  especially  the  transition  spiral. 

The  Transition  Spiral.* 

The  Transition  Spiral  is  a  curve  whose  degree-of-curve  increases 
directly  as  the  distance  along  the  curve  from  the  point  of  curvature. 

Thus,  if  the  spiral  is  to  change  at  the  rate  of  io°  per  ioo  feet, 
at  10  feet  from  the  beginning  of  the  spiral  the  curvature  will  be  the 
same  as  that  of  a  i°  curve;  at  25  feet,  as  of  a  20  30'  curve;  at  60 
feet,  as  of  a  6°  curve.  Likewise,  at  60  feet,  the  spiral  may  be  com- 
pounded with  a  6°  curve;  at  80  feet,  with  an  8°  curve,  etc. 

This  curve  fulfills  the  requirements  for  a  transition  curve.  Its 
curvature  increases  as  the  distance  measured  around  the  curve. 
The  formulas  for  its  use  are  comparatively  simple  and  easy.  The 
field  work  and  the  computations  necessary  in  laying  it  out  and  in 
connecting  it  with  circular  curves  are  neither  long  nor  complicated, 
and  are  similar  to  those  for  simple  circular  curves.     The  curve  is 

*The  author  desires  to  express  his  obligation  to  Mr.  J.  K.  Rarker,  '92,  for  valuable  aid  in  the 
preparation  of  drawings,  the  calculation  of  tables,  and  the  checking  of  formulas. 


7-  THE    TECHNOGRAPH. 

extremely  llexible,  and  may  easily  be  adapted  to  die  requirements 
of  varieil  problems.  The  rate  of  change  of  degree-of-curve  may 
be  made  any  desirable  amount  according  to  the  maximum  curve 
used,  or  according  to  the  requirements  of  the  ground. 

As    the    derivation    of   the  formulas    is    somewhat    long,  their 
demonstration  will  be  given  first.     The  explanation  and  application 
of  these  formulas  to  the  field  work  and  to  the  computations  will  be 
given  separately,  a  knowledge  of  the  demonstration  not  being  essen 
tial  to  the  application. 

In  Fig.  i,  AEL  is  the  transition  spiral  connecting  the  initial 
tangent  with  the  main  or  circular  curve  LH.  A  is  the  beginning  of 
the  spiral  and  will  be  known  as  P.S.,  point  of  spiral.  AP  is  the 
prolongation  of  the  initial  tangent  and  will  be  used  as  the  axis  of 
X.  L  is  the  beginning  of  the  circular  curve  LH,  and  will  be  called 
P.C.C.,  point  of  circular  curve.  D  is  the  point  where  the  circular 
curve  produced  backward  gives  a  tangent  DN  parallel  to  the  tan- 
gent AP,  and  will  be  called  the  P.C.  of  the  produced  simple  curve. 
BD  is  also  the  offset  between  the  tangent  of  a  curve  with  a  transi- 
tion spiral,  and  a  curve  without  the  spiral  but  having  the  same 
change  of  direction  as  the  former. 

The  degree-of-curve  of  the  spiral  at  any  point  is  the  same  as 
the  degree  of  a  simple  curve  having  the  same  radius  of  curvature 
as  the  spiral  has  at  that  point.  The  radius  of  the  spiral  changes 
from  infinity  at  the  P.S.  to  that  of  the  main  curve  at  the  P.C.C. 
The  spiral  and  a  simple  curve  of  the  same  degree  will  be  tangent 
to  each  other  at  any  given  point;  i.  e.,  they  will  have  a  common 
tangent. 

The  following  nomenclature  will  be  used: 

R— radius  of  curvature  of  the  spiral  at  any  point. 

Z>  — degree-of-curve  of  the  spiral  at  any  point.  At  the  P.C.C, 
D  becomes  the  degree  of  the  main  curve. 

aerate  of  change  of  D  per  station  of  100  feet  measured  on 
the  curve. 

j=length   in  feet  from  the  P.S.  to  any  point  on  the  spiral. 

Z  =  total  length  of  the  spiral  measured  in  stations  of  100  feet. 

/  total  central  angle  of  the  whole  curve,  or  twice  BCH  of  Fig. 
i,ll  being  the  middle  of  the  circular  arc. 

J— angle  showing  the  change  of  direction  of  the  spiral  at  any 
point,  and  is  the  angle  between  the  initial  tangent  and  the  tangent 
to  the  spiral  at  the  given  point.  For  the  whole  spiral  it  is  equal  to 
PTL.     The  latter  is  also  equal  to  DCL. 


TALBOT— RAILWAY  TRANSITION  CURVES.  79 

9=  deflection  angle  at  the  P.S.,  from  the  initial  tangent  to  any 
point  on  the  spiral.     For  the  point  L,  it  is  BAL. 

0  =  deflection  angle  at  any  point  on  the  spiral,  between  the  tan- 
gent at  that  point  and  a  chord  to  any  other  point.  For  L,  $  is 
TLA. 

.r=abscissa  of  any  point  on  the  spiral,  referred  to  the  P.S.  as 
the  origin  and  the  initial  tangent  as  the  axis  of  X.  For  the  point 
L,  a:=AM. 

^=ordinate  of  the  same  point,  measured  at  right  angles  to  the 
above  axis.     For  the  point  L,  j=ML. 

/  =  abscissa  of  the  P.C.  of  the  main  curve  produced  backward; 
i.  e.,  of  a  simple  curve  without  the  spiral.     For  the  point  D,  /  =  AB. 

<?=offset  between  the  initial  tangent  and  the  parallel  tangent 
from  the  main  curve  produced  backward,  or  it  is  the  ordinate  of  the 
P.C.  of  the  produced  main  curve.  If  D  is  the  P.C,  BD  is  o.  It  is 
also  the  radial  distance  between  the  concentric  circles  LH  and  BK. 

T=  tangent-distance  for  spiral  and  main  curve  =  distance 
from  A  to  the  intersection  of  tangents. 

-£'=external-distance  for  spiral  and  main  curve. 

C=long  chord  AL  of  the  transition  spiral. 

The  length  of  the  spiral  is  to  be  measured  along  chords  around 
the  curve  in  the  same  way  that  simple  curves  are  usually  measured. 
The  best  railroad  practice,  in  the  writer's  opinion,  considers  curves 
up  to  a  7°  curve  as  measured  with  ioo-ft.  chords,  from  70  to  140  as 
measured  with  50-ft.  chords,  and  from  14"  upwards  as  measured 
with  25 -ft.  chords;  that  is  to  say,  a  70  curve  is  one  in  which  two  50- 
ft.  chords  together  subtend  70  of  central  angle,  a  140  curve  one  in 
which  four  25-ft.  chords  together  subtend  14°  of  central  angle.  The 
advantages  of  this  method  are  two-fold, — the  length  of  the  curve 
as  measured  along  the  chords  more  nearly  approximates  the  actual 
length  of  the  curve,  and  the  radius  of  the  curve  is  almost  exactly 
inversely  proportional  to  the  degree-of-curve.  The  latter  consider- 
ation is   an  important  one,  simplifying  many  formulas.     With   this 

5  TJ50 

definition  of  degree-of-curve,  the  formula  J?—  j)  will  give  no  er- 
ror greater  than  1  in  2000.  For  a  io°  curve  the  error  in  the  radius 
is  .15  feet,  and  for  a  160  curve  .06  feet.  The  resulting  difference  in 
the  alignment  or  distance  for  the  ordinary  length  of  spiral  will  be 
considerably  less  than  this  amount.  For  the  transition  spiral,  then, 
the  error  either  in  alignment  or  distance  will  be  well  within  the 
—6 


THE    TECHNOGRAPH. 


limits  of  accuracy  of  the  field  work,  and  hence  the  relation  R—  j} 
will  be  considered  true. 


A 

B                   x  T                MP 

H 

S^--\J0    > 

r  '_ ...       r.T"  --V  i 

Fig.  i. 

Demonstration  of  Formulas. — From  the  definition  of  the 
transition  spiral,  we  have,  remembering  that  the  value  of  a  as 
defined  above  requires  the  length  of  curve  to  be  measured  in  100- 
ft.  units  {stations)  instead  of  feet, 

a  s 
Z)=aL="     

IOO 

From  the  calculus  the  radius  of  curvature 


CO 


ds 
R= — . 
dA 

B  7  :i  i) 

Substituting  the  expression  /?=  /}   and  solving, 

a  s  ds 

dJ  = . 


a  Z" 


573000 

a  y 

Integrating,  J  — = 

1 146000        1 14.6 

Changing  J  from  circular  measure  to  degrees, 
d=j£tfZ8, 

which  is  the  intrinsic  equation  of  the  Transition  Spiral. 

D 

Since  from  (1 )  a—  — ,  we  also  have 


(0 


D  I. 


a 


(3) 


TALBOT— RAILWAY  TRANSITION  CURVES.  81 

From  these  equations  it  will  be  seen  that 

(a)  the  change  of  direction  of  the  spiral  varies  as  the  square 
of  the  length  instead  of  as  the  first  power  of  the  length  as  in  the 
simple  circular  curve,  and 

(b)  that  the  transition  spiral  for  any  angle  J  will  be  twice  as 
long  as  a  simple  circular  curve. 

To  find  the  co-ordinates,  x  and  y,  of  any  point  on  the  spiral, 
we  have  by  the  calculus  dy=ds  sin  J  and  dx=ds  cos  J.  Expand- 
ing the  sine  and  cosine  into  an  infinite  series,  substituting  for  ds  its 
value  in  terms  of  dJ,  and  integrating,  we  have 

"  I07°-5  (      .     s  "       7         I  n  ') 

y= ]  ft* ->*+ J*  -etc.  -   (4) 

(«)»    I  42  1320  \ 


1070.5  C  1     ,      1  ) 

)a% j*+ j?_etc.    '- 

(oj%    (_  10         216  \ 


x= 1  JX J-+ J?— etc.    (- (5) 


As  J  here  is  measured  in  circular  measure  and  is  only  ]/2  when 
the  angle  is  28.°65,  these  series  are  rapidly  converging,  especially 
for  smaller  angles. 

Changing  the  angle  J  from  circular  measure  to  degrees,  and 
dropping  the  small  terms, 

y=.z<)\  a L? — .00000158  as  L1 (6) 

For  values  of  J  less  than  150  the  last  term  may  be  dropped, 

and  up  to  250  the  term  will  be  small.     D  L~  may  also  be  written  in 

place  of  a  L?.     Also 

jc=iooZ — .00075  a2  I? (7) 

Or  jv=iooZ — .00075  D*  L6 (8) 

The  last  term  in  eq.  (7)  or  (8)  may  be  used  as  a  correction  to 
be  subtracted  from  the  length  of  the  curve  in  feet. 

.    To  find  the  deflection  angle  8  for  any  point  on  the  spiral,  as 
BAL  for  the  point  L,  divide  equation  (4)  by  equation  (5). 

tan  0=^3  J  +  A  J34-15||25_l5,  etc.     But  from  the  tangent  series 

for  y3j, 

tan  yi  J  =  yi  J -\- ^  J3.-|-7^F  J5,  etc.      Subtracting  one  from  the 

other,  we  get  a  series  which  is  rapidly  decreasing  when  J  is  less 
than  400.  Investigating  this  difference,  remembering  that  J  is  in 
circular  measure,  it  is  found  that  the  error  of  calling  the  two  equa- 
tions equal  is  less  than  i'  for  J  =  25°  and  decreases  rapidly  below 
this.     As  J  will  rarely  reach  250  and  as  the  resultant  error  of  direc- 


////•:    TECHNOGRAPH 

tion  will   be  corrected  at  the    P.C.C.  when   J— 9  is   turned   off,  wc 

may  write  D1 

'  6     •    J      ' .,«/  L*     '•,  — (9) 

(7 

Between  200  and  40",  .000053  J:i  (where  J  is  in  degrees)  will 
give  the  numbers  of  minutes  correction  to  be  subtracted  from  'J 
to  give  9. 

To  find  the  tangent  at  the  terminal  point  of  the  spiral,  L,  lay 
off  a  deflection  angle  from  LA  equal  to  J — 9.  When  J  is  not  over 
20",  ?jJ,  or  2H  may  be  used.  This  since  FLT=PTL=  J,  and  FLA 
=PAL=0. 

The  tangent  at  any  other  point  on  the  spiral  is  found  in  the 
same  manner,  using  the  9  and  J  for  that  point. 


W       A 


B'         F    B 


T        M 


>f^.~ 

--ij- 

Lt* 

T^ — ■ 

• — .!>  A 

1 

1   A 

1 

^&  "■ 

-  -  _    Dr-  - 
"  -1-  - 

_^ — -ti^*-^' 

\ 

1 
1 

^ 

""  ~~  -  *-L      "^^v 

\ 

**«. 

^ 

d|-^--\: 

">Jr 

\ 

!U 

//VV 

T"  " 

1 

s;^v 

1 

1 

/       \      N 
/              v 

*&S 

JN 

<kC 

\\Vx 

v!H 

/c: 

V     x  (TIM 

\ 

Fig.  2. 

At  any  point  on  the  spiral  to  find  the  deflection  angle  for  a  sec- 
ond point.  In  Fig.  2,  let  /,,  be  the  distance  from  the  P.S.  to  R,  and 
L  the  distance  from  the  P.S.  to  any  other  point  on  the  spiral,  as  K. 
Let  FRN  be  the  tangent  at  R,  and  RFM  =  J,  its  angle  with  the  ini- 
tial tangent.  Let  KTM=:J  be  angle  of  tangent  at  K  with  initial 
tangent,  equal  to  total  change  of  direction  of  the  spiral  up  to  that 
point.  KRN  =  "/^required  deflection  angle.  Then 
UK      >•-,•, 

tan  (0+4)= = • 

RU     x—xx 

Substituting  for  the  co-ordinates  their  values  from  equations 

JS —  jia 
(4)  and  (5),  and  also  developing  tan  '3       .  -      ,    into    a    series,  and 


TALBOT— RAILWAY   TRANSITION  CURVES.  83 

subtracting  the  latter  from  the  former,  an  expression  for  the  differ- 
ence will  be  found,  which  amounts  to  but  a  small  fraction  of  a  min- 
ute for  any  value  of  J  up  to  350.     Hence  we  may  write 

<lJjrJl  —  yi  (Jt-f  J/7*  J '-;-|_J);  whence  by  substitution  and  reduction, 

9—^a  Zj  (L—L^+Yea  (L—Ltf (10) 

It  will  be  noticed  that  the  first  term  is  the  deflection  angle  for 
a  simple  curve  of  the  same  degree  as  the  spiral  at  the  point  R 
(called  the  osculating  circle),  and  of  length  equal  to  the  distance 
between  the  two  points;  while  the  second  is  the  deflection  angle  at 
the  P.S.  from  the  initial  tangent  for  an  equal  length  of  spiral.  If 
the  second  point  had  been  chosen  on  the  side  nearer  the  P.S.,  the 
second  term  would  have  an  opposite  sign  from  the  first.  Equation 
(10)  may  then  be  written  with  the  plus  and  minus  sign. 

The  spiral  then  deflects  from  a  circle  of  the  same  degree-of- 
curye  at  the  same  rate  that  it  deflects  from  the  initial  tangent. 
D'RH,  in  Fig.  2,  represents  the  circular  curve  tangent  to  spiral  at 
R,  the  two  having  the  same  radius  at  that  point  and  both  being 
tangent  to  FRN.  The  deflection  angles  between  points  on  the 
spiral  and  on  the  circle  RH,  and  also  between  the  spiral  and  RD' 
are  the  same  as  for  the  same  length  of  spiral  from  A.  In  the  same 
way  at  K,  RKT=SKT — SKR,  the  latter  angle  being  equal  to  the  de- 
flection from  initial  tangent  at  A  for  a  length  of  spiral  equal  to  KR. 

It  may  also  be  readily  shown  from  (2)  that  the  difference  in 
direction  of  the  two  tangents,  J — Jlf  is  the  central  angle  for  this 
simple  curve  plus  the  spiral  angle,  both  for  a  length  equal  to  the 
distance  between  the  two  points. 

It  may  also  be  shown  that  the  distance  between  a  point  on  the 
spiral  and  on  this  osculating  circle  is  the  same  as  the  ordinate  y 
from  the  initial  tangent  for  this  length. 

To   find    the    offset    o.  From    Fig.    1,    BD   =   BF  —  DF 

=  BF— CD  vers  DCL.  But  tf=BD,  BF=y  for  end  of  spiral,  DCL 
=  J  for  whole  spiral,  and  CD=Z\  Hence,  o=y — R  vers  J.  Sub- 
stituting for  v,  R,  and  J  their  values  in  terms  of  the  length  of  the 
whole  spiral,  and  reducing,  we  have  for  0  in  feet 

^  =  .0725  a  Z3=.o725  D  Z2 (it) 

where  D  and  Z  refer  to  the  whole  length  of  the  spiral..  The  other 
terms  of  the  series  are  so  small  that  they  may  be  dropped  when  J 
is  less  than  300.  It  will  be  seen  that  o  is  approximately  one-fourth 
of  the  ordinate  of  the  P.C.C.,  which  of  course  should  be  true  if  E, 
the  middle  point  of  the  spiral,  is  opposite  D,  the  P.C. 


II!  I    TECHNOGRAPH. 

I'ofindt,  or  A  I!.      From  Fig.  i,  AB     AM— BM     *— FL    x— 

R  sin  J.     Kxpanding  and  reducing, 

t     50  /.— .000125  ,7     /       ' 
or     /     50  /, — .000125  D*  L%  \ 

Hence  to  find  /,  from  one-half  the  length  of  the  spiral  in  feet 
subtract  ,„'„„  of  the  product  of  the  square  of  the  degree  of  the  main 
curve  by  the  cube  of  the  length   of  the  spiral,  the  latter  being  ex- 
sed  in  stations  of  100  feet. 

A  comparison  of  /  with  the  abscissa  found  by  substituting  '_■  L 
in  equation  (8)  shows  that  BD  cuts  the  spiral  at  a  point  only  .00005 
D  I  feet  from  the  middle  point  of  the  spiral.  This  is  /„  of  the 
correction  used  in  equation  (12)  for  finding  /  from  )  j  /. .  1  or  our 
purpose  we  may  say  that  BD  bisects  the  spiral.  It  also  follows  that 
the  spiral  bisects  the  line  BD,  since  BE=  jiy. 

If  the  offset  is  given.     From  (1 1)  and  (3)  we  have 

I  =3.7141/  — (13) 

J  =  i.857yV/T (,4) 

a=   .2691   y (15) 

3:,  i'-;,  and  {',-,  may  be  used  for  these  co-efficients  with  advantage. 

To  find  the  tangent-distance  7',  consider  in  Fig.  1  that  AB  in- 
tersects CH,  H  being  the  middle  of  the  circular  curve,  at  some 
point  P  outside  the  diagram.  Then  AP-AB+BP.  BP  =  BC  tan 
BCH. 

Hence  T=t  +  (R+o)  tan  ^  I (16) 

/  and  0  tan  ]{,  I  may  be  computed  separately  and  added  to  the 
/found  from  an  ordinary  table  of  tangent-distances. 

9 


Fig.  3. 

1 6)  gives   /  for  the  same   transition   spirals  at  each  end  of  the 
main  curve.       It  may  be  desirable  to  make  one  spiral  different  from 


TALBOT— RAILWAY  TRANSITION  CURVES.  85 

the  other.  To  find  an  expression  for  the  tangent-distances  for  this 
case,  proceed  as  follows:  In  Fig.  3,  let  RS=HD=/7f,  BD  =  <?„  AB  = 
/„  RT  =  /2,  AE=7'„  TE--  '/'.,,  A'  -radius  of  main  curve  DLKS, 
J?+<?2 -radius  of  HR,  and  /wangle  PER. 

Then  7,1=/,+HC— PE,  and 

Tt-  !+(tf+*2)  tan  y2  r—{o—o.:)  cot  I (r7) 

Similarly,  Tz—tr\-(R-\-o^  tan  l/j  /+(", — o2)  cosec  /. 

When  7  is  more  than  900,  the  last  term  of  ( 17)  becomes  essen- 
tially positive. 

To  find  the  external- distance,  is  =  H  P.  In  Fig.  1 ,  H  P  =  K  P+  H  K. 
Hence 

E=(R+o)  exsec  y2I  +  0 (18) 

To  find  the  long  chord,  C=AL.       In  Fig.  1,  ML— AL  sin  MAL, 

y 

or  C= .     Putting  this  in  terms  of  the  length  of  the  curve, 

sin  6 

C=  100L — (.0004  ar L*  or  .0004  Z>2Z3),    (19) 

in  which  Cis  in  feet  and  Z  in  stations.  It  will  be  seen  that  the  last 
or  correction  term  is  ts  of  the  correction  for  x  as  given  in  equa- 
tion (7). 

The  middle  ordinate  for  any  arc  is  equal  to  the  middle  ordinate 
for  an  equal  length  of  circular  curVe  of  the  same  degree-of-curve 
as  the  spiral  at  the  middle  point  of  the  arc  considered.  This  degree- 
of-curve  is  the  average  of  the  D's,  at  the  end  of  the  given  arc.  This 
is  an  approximate  formula  which  is  true  whether  one  end  of  the 
chord  is  at  the  P.S.  or  not. 

The  ordinate  for  any  other  point  along  the  chord  may  be  found 

as  follows.     If  /  is   the  half  arc,  /'  the   distance  from   the   middle 

point  of  the  arc  to  the  required  chord-ordinate,  y  the  ordinate  from 

the  initial  tangent  for  a  distance/  from  the  P.S.,  andy  the  same  for 

distance  /',  then  the  required   ordinate  from   the   chord  equals  the 

corresponding  ordinate  for    a  circular  curve    of   same    degree-of- 

/' 
curve  as  middle  point   of  arc,  minus  or  plusy,  plus  or  minus        v; 

the  first  sign  being  used  for  ordinates  on  the  side  of  the  middle 
point  away  from  the  P.S.  and  the  second  when  toward  it. 

Summary  of  Principles. — For  convenience  of  reference  the 
principal  formulas  will  be  repeated  here. 


THE  TECHSOGRAPtt. 

D^al (0 

Dl       P (2) 

H     \J     \a  I  ■     \  D  I      \-^ (9) 

*=  \a  /,.    /— /,,)4-,U  (/.— Z,r 

=  \  D  (Z— Zi)  ±h  (Z>+Z>, )  (Z— A) (IO) 

0  -oi'iD  /.■ (11) 

/—  50/. — .000125  (a*  Ls  or  Dl  Z8) (12) 

T=f  +  (R+o)  tanj£  I (16) 

An  inspection  of  the  formulas  and  demonstrations  will  show  the 
following  properties  of  the  transition  spiral: 

1.  The  degree-of  curve  D  at  any  point  on  the  spiral  equals  the 
product  of  the  rate  of  change  of  D  per  100  feet  by  the  distance 
from  the  P.S.  expressed  in  stations  of  100  feet.     1  Eq.  1.) 

2.  The  angle  J  between  the  initial  tangent  and  the  tangent  at 
any  point  on  the  spiral  (the  change  of  direction,  corresponding  to 
central  angle  of  circular  curves)  equals: 

(a)  One-half  the  rate  a  multiplied  by  the  square  of  the  dis- 
tance in  stations; 

(b)  One-half  the  product  of  the  distance  in  stations  by  the 
degree-of-curve  of  the  spiral  at  the  given  point,  or  one-half  of  the 
angle  for  a  circular  curve  of  this  degree-of-curve  and  of  the  same 
length; 

(c)  One-half  the  square  of  the  degree-of-curve  at  the  point 
divided  by  the  rate  of  change  of  D. 

This  is  true  for  any  point  along  the  spiral.  For  the  terminal 
point,  D  becomes  the  degree  of  main  curve.  For  the  same  angle 
J,  the  spiral  is  twice  as  long  as  a  circular  curve.     (Eq.  2.) 

3.  The  dellection  angle  <->  at  the  P.S.,  from  the  initial  tangent  to 
any  point  on  the  spiral,  as  PAL  in  Fig.  1,  is  ' .;  J,  or  one-sixth  of  the 
product  of  the  rate  and  the  square  of  the  distance  from  the  P.S  ex- 
pressed in  stations.  It  is  also  one-third  of  the  dellection  angle  for 
a  simple  curve  of  the  same  degree  as  the  spiral  at  the  given  point. 
(Eq.  9.) 

4  The  angle  between  tangents  at  any  two  points  on  the  spiral 
is  J — J,  or  the  difference  between  the  respective  angles  of  these  tan- 


r.\Ui<rr-i:.\ll.\\\)    TRANSITION  CVR]  ES  -7 

gents  with  the  initial  tangent.  J — Ji  =  j£<*  (/.- — Lf).  It  is  also 
one-half  of  the  sum  of  the  central  angles  of  two  simple  curves  of 
length  equal  to  the  distance  between  the  two  points  and  of  degree 
equal  respectively  to  the  degree-of-curve  of  the  spiral  at  the  two 
points.     (Eq.  2.) 

5.  The  deflection  angle  at  any  point  on  the  spiral  from  its  tan- 
gent to  the  P.S.  is  J — &\  or  when  J  is  less  than  200,  it  is  also  -\ J  = 
28.  This  enables  the  tangent  at  any  point  to  be  found.  (Eqs.  2  and  9.) 

6.  The  deflection  angle  from  a  tangent  at  any  point  on  the 
spiral  to  any  other  point  on  the  spiral  is  the  sum  or  difference  of  1  1) 
the  deflection  angle  for  a  simple  curve  of  same  degree  as  the  spiral 
at  the  given  point  and  of  length  equal  to  the  distance  between  the 
points,  and  (2)  the  spiral  deflection  angle  at  the  P.S.  for  a  length 
equal  to  the  distance  between  the  two  points.  The  latter  angle  is 
plus  if  the  desired  point  is  further  from  the  P.S.,  and  minus  it  nearer, 
than  the  point  from  which  the  deflections  are  made.  See  illustrations 
under  Field  Work.     (Eq.  10.) 

7.  The  spiral  diverges  from  its  osculating  circle  (circular  curve 
of  same  degree)  at  any  point  at  the  same  rate  that  the  spiral  deflects 
from  the  initial  tangent,  and  the  distance  between  the  circle  and 
spiral  is  the  same  as  the  y  for  an  equal  length  of  spiral. 

8.  The  offset  0  between  the  initial  tangent  and  the  parallel  tan- 
gent from  the  main  curve  produced  backward  in  feet,  equals  .0725 
times  the  product  of  the  rate  by  the  cube  of  the  length  of  the  whole 
spiral  in  stations,  or  .0725  times  the  square  of  the  length  of  spiral 
and  the  degree  of  main  curve.  This  ordinate  is  approximately  one- 
fourth  of  the  ordinate  ^  of  the  end  of  the  spiral.  The  spiral  bisects 
the  offset  at  a  point  half-way  between  the  P.S.,  and  the  P.C.C. 
(Eq.  11.) 

9.  The  distance  /  from  the  P.S.  to  this  offset  is  found  by  sub- 
tracting the  correction  .oooi25tf\Z"'  from  the  half  length  of  the  curve 
in  feet.     (Eq.  12.) 

10.  The  long  chord  is  found  by  subtracting  the  correction, 
.0004  D9LS  from  the  length  of  the  curve  in  feet.     (Eq.  19.) 

11.  Other  properties  may  be  found  by  ordinary  trigonometric 
operations. 

The  Field  Work. — Before  running  the  curve,  the  value  of  a 
must  be  decided  upon.  If  it  is  desired  to  connect  a  given  tangent 
with  a  given  curve,  the  offset  0  between  the  tangent  being  known,  a 
may  be  calculated  from  equation  (15),  page  84.  This  method  of 
work  may  be  a  great  convenience  in  location.     Generally,  however, 


rill    TBCIISOGR  1/7/ 

lerations  of  maximum  degree-of  curve,  the  length  of  tangents, 
and  the  speed  ol  trains  will  determine  the  value  of  a  to  be  used.  In 
mountainous  country,  with  i<>  maximum  and  low  speeds,  a  change 
i  in  10  feet  («=  10)  will  be  suitable.  For  high  speeds  and  6°  max- 
imum, a  -  will  give  an  easy-riding  curve,  and  for  some  locations  a 
value  even  lower  than  i  may  be  desirable.  For  electric  and  elevated 
roads,  values  as  la:  may  be  necessary.     It  will  be  seen  that 

the  curve  is  applicable  to  a  wide  range  of  work. 

If  the  degree -of-curve  at  any  required  point  is  an  integral  num- 
ber, the  principle  that  the  deflection  angle  is  one-third  of  that  for  a 
simple  curve  may  be  used.  Thus  for  a—  10,  at  40  feet  from  the  P.S., 
the  D  of  the  spiral  will  be  ac.  Calculate  one-third  of  the  deflection 
angle  for  40  feet  of  4"  curve.  It  may  be  seen  that  T'„  of  the  D  gives 
the  required  deflection  per  foot  for  the  point  whose  curvature  is  D. 

It  desired,  the  calculations  may  be  made  by  means  of  a  table  as 
shown  hereafter.  Or  the  powers  of  /.  may  be  taken  from  a  table  of 
squares  and  cubes,  the  lower  decimals  dropped,  and  the  multiplica- 
tion by  the  simple  factors  remaining  may  be  made  easily  and  rapidly. 
Thus,  when  a— 2  to  determine  w  for  a  point  234  feet  (2.34  stations) 
from  the  P.S.,  find  the  square  of  234  (54756),  change  the  decimal 
point  so  that  it  will  become  the  square  of  2.34  (5.48),  and  from 
equation  (9)  h  '  ,,//, '—'6  x  2  X  5.48=1"  49'.  For  o  and  y  the 
table  of  cubes  may  be  used  in  a  similar  way. 

The  field  work  after  the  P.S.  has  been  determined  is  similar  to 
that  of  circular  curves.  The  deflection  angles  are  turned  off  by  the 
transit,  and  the  measurements  are  made  along  chords  as  in  laying 
out  circular  curves.  Since  it  is  not  necessary  to  make  succeeding 
chords  the  same  length  as  the  first,  the  stationing  may  be  kept  up, 
and  the  even  stations  and  +5o's  put  in  as  usual.  Herein  is  an  ad- 
vantage over  methods  requiring  a  regular  length  of  chord  to  be  put 
in.  When  the  transit  is  moved  to  a  point  on  the  spiral,  the  tangent 
is  found  by  laying  off  from  the  chord  to  the  P.S.  an  angle=  J — B. 
I  01  usual  limits  this  is  also  20.  Finally,  the  circular  curve  is  run  in 
from  the  P.C.C.,  the  tangent  to  the  curve  first  having  been  found. 

If  it  is  necessary  to  use  a  transit  point  on  the  spiral,  the  tan- 
gent at  that  point  is  found  as  before,  and  the  deflections  are  calcu- 
lated by  equation  (10)  and  will  equal  the  deflections  for  a  circular 
curve  of  the  same  degree  as  the  spiral  at  the  transit-point  minus  or 
plus  the  spiral  deflection  angle  atthe  P.S. — minus  if  toward,  and  plus  if 
from  the  P.S.  -the  length  used  in  both  cases  being  the  distance  from 
the  transit  point  to  the  point  to  be  set. 


TALBOT—  RAILWA  V  TRANSITION  CURVES. 

In  running  from  the  P.C.C.,  to  the  P.S.,  use  a  similar  method. 
Here  D  is  the  degree  of  main  curve.  After  finding  the  tangent  at 
the  P.C.C.,  the  following  rule  may  be  used:  To  find  the  deflection 
angle  for  any  point  on  the  spiral  at  a  distance  L  from  the  P.C.C., 
calculate  the  deflection  angle  for  a  D°  curve  and  length  L,  and  also 
the  deflection  at  the  P.S.  for  a  spiral  of  length  L.  Subtract  the 
latter  from  the  former.  The  remainder  will  be  the  required  angle. 
If  the  new  point  is  to  be  used  as  a  transit-point,  the  new  tangent 
may  be  obtained  by  laying  off  an  angle  equal  to  deflection  of  circular 
curve  of  length  L  and  of  same  degree  as  the  spiral  at  the  new 
point,  plus  the  spiral  deflection  for  length  L. 

As  an  illustration,  let  the  P.  S.  be  at  sta.  16  +  21,  17  the  new  tran- 
sit-point, and  17  +  50,  the  point  to  be  set.  Assume  a  to  be  4.  Then 
the  deflection  angle  at  the  P.S.  for  sta.  17  may  be  found  from  equa- 
tion (9)  as  follows:  Station  17  is  79  feet  from  the  P.S. ,  and  hence  L 
=  .79.  798  =  624i,  and  .79-'  =  . 62.  Since  J&  X  60=10,  we  may  get 
H  in  minutes  by  multiplying  a/J  by  10.  Hence  0=io  X  4  X  .62  = 
25'.  J  =  y2  X  4  X  .62  X  60  =  75'.  <P  -  75' — 25'  =  50'  With  the 
transit  at  17,  a  deflection  angle  of  50'  from  the  line  to  the  P.S.  will 
give  the  tangent.  The  degree-of-curve  at  17  is  4  X  .79  =  3. °i6,  which 
has  a  deflection  angle  of  o'.95  per  foot.  To  get  the  deflection  angle 
to  set  17  +  50,  take  deflection  angle  for  50  feet  of  3°.i6  curve  = 
47^2',  and  also  the  deflection  angle  for  50  feet  of  spiral  =  10';  then 
#=  47*  +  io'  =  57',  with  which  17  +  50  may  be  set.  If  the  point 
were  on  the  side  nearer  the  P.S.,  as  16  +  50,  the  deflection  angle 
would  be  47' — 10'  =  37'. 

To  facilitate  the  computation,  a  transit-point  may  be  chosen  at 
a  point  where  the  spiral  has  an  even  degree-of-curve.  For  example, 
164-96  will  be  30  curve,  and  the  circular  deflections  from  this  curve 
are  more  easily  calculated. 

If  desired,  the  spiral  may  be  located  by  ordinates  from  the  tan- 
gent or  from  a  circular  curve  tangent  at  any  point  on  the  spiral. 
Thus,  in  Fig.  2,  the  ordinates  from  AB,  from  RDl,  from  RH,  and 
from  KSD,  as  calculated  from  equation  (6).  with  L  as  the  distance 
from  A,  R,  or  K,  will  give  points  on  the  spiral. 

To  locate  the  P.  S. — If  the  tangents  have  been  run  to  an  inter- 
section, the  tangent-distance  T  may  be  calculated  by  equation  (15) 
and  the  P.  S.  measured  in. 

In  case  a  simple  curve  has  been  run  without  a  transition,  the 
distance  of  the  P.  S.  back  of  the  P.  C.  used  is  t  +  o  tan  j4  /,  where  / 


90 


THE  TECHXOGRAPlt. 


is  the  angle  between  the  tangents,     The  new  curve  will  come  inside 
the  old,  but  will  not  be  exactly  parallel  to  it. 

If  a  simple  curve  has  been  run,  as  DLH  in  Fig.  i,  and  also  a 
tangent  AB,  with  an  offset  #=BD  between  them,  the  spiral  to  con- 
nect them  may  be  located  by  finding  a  from  equation  (15),  which 
js  a  — .2691  /;:;  With  this  value  of  a,  t  may  be  calculated  or 
found  from  the  table  as  explained  below.  This  method  is  a  great 
convenience  where  it  is  desired  on  account  of  the  ground  to  throw 
the  curve  in  or  out  without  changing  the  tangent,  or  where  a  similar 
change  in  the  tangent  is  desired  without  a  change  in  the  curve, — 
the  connection  being  made  by  means  of  a  suitable  spiral. 

To  replace  a  simple  cutve  by  a  spiral  and  new  curve,  without 
varying  far  from  the  old  line  and  so  keep  on  the  old  embankment, 
proceed  as  follows.  In  Fig.  4,  the  line  TNH  is  the  old  curve.  It  is 
desired    to   throw    the  track  out    a    distance   HK=/,   in  order    to 


A 

T 

B 

M                  P 

n  u 

~~^Z    ' 

1 

U  h 

1 

G  1 

v  N    ' 

s 

\Jl 

\ 

\ 

/    x 

\ 

/       %\ 

[                  \' 

\  \ 

1                            / 

1                   / 

V            \\K^ 

c                   / 

\             A" 

1          •*J/ 

/ 
1                 / 

1               / 

*'      \           t 

1       /             -- 

1       /          ,,  ** 

\ 

S  L 

!r 

1    /         " 

1  ^ 

"C 

!  3T' 

^ 

„  -  "c' 

c"1-"'" 

Fig.  4. 


in  a  spiral  by  throwing  it  in  at  the  P.  C.  P  is  the  intersec- 
tion of  tangents,  which  comes  outside  the  diagram.  Let  Rl  be 
the  radius  of 'the  old  curve,  and  R  of  the  new.  HP — KP=/,  or 
Rx  exsec  ]/2  I — (R+o)  exsec  y2  \—p.     Hence 

P 

R\ — R~o-\- ,    from   which    the    degree    of  the   new 

exsec  T2   / 

curve  may  be  found. 


TALBOT— It  AILWA  Y  TRANSITION  CURVES. 


91 


Also  AT=AP— TP=/—  (R  —  R— *)tan  y2  /=/—/>  cot  #  /, 
by  which  the  P.  S.  may  be  located.  A  value  of  p  may  be  chosen 
to  cause  the  least  re-lining  of  track. 


Fig.  5. 

Covipound  Curves. — The  spiral  may  be  used  to  connect  curves 
of  different  radii,  choosing  that  part  of  the  spiral  having  curvature 
intermediate  between  the  degrees  of  the  two  curves;  thus,  connect 
a  30  and  an  8°  curve  by  omitting  the  spiral  up  to  ^=3°  and  con- 
tinuing until  Z>=8°.  In  Fig.  5,  DK  is  a  D\  curve,  which  it  is  de- 
sired to  connect  with  a  D\  curve,  the  transition  to  commence  at  K. 
Z>2  is  greater  than  D1.  The  degree  of  the  spiral  at  K  is  A  .  Sup- 
pose the  spiral  to  be  run  backward  from  K  to  a  tangent  at  A.  The 
continuation  of  this  spiral  from  K  to  P,  where  it  becomes  a  D\  curve, 
may  be  run  from  K  the  same  as  from  any  point  on  the  spiral  ac- 
cording to  the  method  before  described,  and  no  part  of  the  spiral 
from  K  to  A  need  be  located.      The  length  of  spiral  between   K 

A— A 

and  P=r/— ;  and  the  angle  between  tangents  at  K  and  P  is 

a 
Yo,  l  CA+ £>s),  or  the  average  of  that  for  a  length  /  for  both  curves. 
The  spiral  may  also  be  used  to  connect  two  curves  having  a 
given  offset  between  them. 


THE  TECHNOGR  IPH. 

I  bles. — The  computations  may  be  shortened  by  means  of  the 
following  tables.  Table  I.  may  be  used  for  any  value  of  a.  Table 
II.  is  for  a  change  of  io°  per  ioo  feet,  and  Table  III.  for  3  |    ". 

The  first  column  contains  the  distance  in  feet  from  the  l\S.; 
the  second,  the  degree-of-curve  of  the  spiral;  the  third,  the  spiral 
angle  J,  the  fourth,  the  deflection  angle  <->  from  the  initial  tangent; 
the  fifth,  the  offset  o  of  the  initial  tangent  from  the  main  curve  pro- 
duced backward;  the  sixth,  the  ordinate  y  from  the  initial  tangent 
as  the  axis  of  X;  the  seventh,  a  correction  to  be  subtracted  from 
the  length  of  the  spiral  in  feet  to  find  x;  the  eighth,  a  correction  to 
be  subtracted  from  half  the  length  of  the  curve  in  feet  to  find  /.  To 
find  the  long  chord  c,  subtract  i  of  this  x  correction  from  the  length 
of  the  curve  in  feet. 

To  find  intermediate  values,  interpolate  by  multiplying  one 
tenth  of  the  difference  between  consecutive  values  by  the  number 
of  additional  units.  Thus  Table  II.  gives  J  for  140  feet  as  9°48'; 
for  150  feet,  as  nu  15'.  One  tenth  of  the  difference  between  these 
is  8'. 7.     For  146.8  feet,  add  6.8X8.7  =  59'  to  90  48',  giving  io°  47'. 

This  interpolation  gives  a  slight  error  in  J  which  may  be  neg- 
lected for  a  less  than  8,  and  may  not  need  considering  above  that. 
To  find  exact  values,  deduct  the  following  from  the  interpolated 
quantities:  For  a  length  in  feet  ending  with  i,.o27';  25.048';  3,-063'; 
4,  .072';  5,  .075';  6,  .072';  7,  .063';  8,  .048';  9,  .027'.  For  other 
spirals,  multiply  these  corrections  by  a.  For  a—  10,  the  greatest 
error  is  .75'.  This  difference  arises  from  the  fact  that  the  square  of 
numbers  does  not  increase  uniformly. 

Interpolation  in  the  other  columns  gives  accurate  results. 

Table  I.  has  been  carried  to  several  decimal  places  to  permit  a 
use  with  any  value  of  a.  To  do  this,  multiply  the  tabulated  value 
opposite  the  desired  length  by  the  a  of  the  spiral, — except  for  the 
x  and  /  corrections,  when  the  square  of  a  must  be  used  as  the  mul- 
tiplier. Thus,  if  (1=2,  multiply  the  tabulated  J,  9,  0,  or  y  by  2  and 
the  /  and  x  corrections  by  4.  This  may  be  utilized  when  it  is 
desired  to  correct  a  fixed  tangent  with  a  given  circular  curve,  since 
when  a  and  /.  have  been  found  the  other  quantities  may  be  calcu- 
lated by  means  of  this  table.  A  similar  table  for  every  foot  of 
1  would  not  be  very  bulky.  The  value  of  y  obtained  in  this 
way  is  subject  to  error  when  J  is  more  than  16°  for  large  values  of  a. 

The  tables  are  of  such  size  that  they  may  be  cut  out  and  in- 
serted in  the  ordinary  engineer's  field  book. 


TALBOT— RAILW  A  Y  TRANSITION  CURVES. 


93 


TABLE  I.     TRANSITION  SPIRAL.     a  =  r. 


L-ngth 

D 

J 

H 

<? 

y 
0.000 

■XCOR 

/COR 

IO 

O-.  I 

00 

00''.  3 

03  OO1.  I 

.000 

00000 

o.ccoo 

20 

O  .2 

01  .2 

00  .4 

.001 

.002 

30 

0.3 

02  .7 

00  .9 

.002 

.008 

40 

O.4 

04  .8 

01  .6 

.005 

.019 

50 

O.5 

07  .5 

02  .5 

.009 

.036 

60 

O.6 

0 

10.8 

0  03  .6 

.016 

.063 

.0001 

70 

O.7 

14.7 

04.9 

.025 

.100 

.0001 

80 

0  .8 

19  .2 

06  .4 

•037 

•  149 

.0002 

90 

0.9 

24  -3 

08.1 

■053 

.212 

.0004 

.0001 

IOO 

I  .0 

3°- 

10  . 

•073 

.291 

.0008 

.0001 

no 

I  .1 

0 

36.3 

0  12  .1 

.097 

■387 

.0012 

.0002 

120 

I  .2 

43  -2 

14  .4 

.126 

•503 

.0019 

.0003 

I3° 

1  -3 

5° -7 

16  .9 

.160 

•639  ; 

.0028 

.0005 

140 

1 .4 

58.8 

19  .6 

.199 

•798 

.0041 

.0007 

150 

1  5 

1 

07  .5 

22  .5 

•  245 

•982 

.0058 

.0010 

160 

1  .6 

1 

16.8 

0  25  .6 

.298 

1. 191  ; 

i  .0080 

.0013 

170 

1  -7 

1 

26  7 

28  .9 

•357 

1.429 

.0108 

.0018 

;  180 

1  .8 

1 

37  -2 

32  -4 

■424 

1.696 

.0144 

.0024 

;  »9° 

1  .9 

1 

48.3 

36.I 

•499 

1.995 

.0189 

.0031 

2CO 

2  .0 

2 

CO  . 

40. 

.582 

2.327  ; 

.0244 

.0041 

2IO 

2  .1 

2 

12  .3 

0  44.1 

0.673 

2.690 

.031 

.0052 

220 

2  .2 

2 

25  .2 

48.4 

•774 

3097  : 

•039 

.0065 

230 

2  .3 

2 

38.7 

52  9 

.885 

3-538 

\    .049 

.0082 

240 

2  .4 

2 

52  .8 

57-6 

1.005 

4020 

.061 

.0101 

250 

2 -5 

3 

07  -5 

1  02  .5 

1. 136 

4-544  ! 

.074 

.0124 

26o 

2  .6 

3 

22  .8 

1  07  .6 

1  278 

5. in 

.  .090 

.015 

270 

2.7 

3 

387 

1  12  .9 

1  43i 

5- 724 

.109 

.018 

28o 

2  .8 

3 

55  2 

1  18.4 

1.596 

6.383 

;  131 

.022 

29O 

2.9 

4 

12.3 

1  24  .1 

1-773 

7.091 

1  .156 

.027 

300 

3-° 

4 

3°. 

1  30. 

1.963 

7.850  ; 

.185 

.031 

3IO 

3  -i 

4 

48.3 

1  36.1 

2.166 

8.66 

.218 

.036 

320 

3  2 

5 

07  .2 

1  42  .4 

2.382 

9-53 

•255 

•043 

330 

3  -3 

5 

26  .7 

1  48.9 

2.612 

10.45 

.298 

.050 

340 

3  4 

5 

46.8 

1  55-6 

2.857 

11.42 

•346 

.058 

35° 

3-5 

6 

07.5 

2  02  .5 

3. 116 

12.46 

.400 

.067 

360 

3-6 

6 

28.8 

2  09  .6 

3-391 

I3-56 

.460 

.077 

37o 

3  -7 

6 

5°-7 

2  16  .9 

3.681 

14.72 

.528 

.088 

380 

3-8 

7 

13  .2 

2  24.4 

3.988 

'5-94 

•603 

.100 

390 

3  -9 

7 

36.3 

2  32  .1 

4-3" 

1723 

.686 

.114 

400 

4.0 

8 

00  . 

2  40  . 

4651 

1859 

•779 

.130 

410 

4  1 

S 

24-3 

2  48  .1 

5.01 

20.02 

.881 

.147 

420 

4.2 

8 

49  2 

2  56  .4 

538 

21.51 

■994 

.166 

430 

4-3 

9 

U-7 

3  04.9 

5.78 

23.08 

1. 118 

.186 

440 

4  4 

9 

40  .8 

3  13  -6 

6.19 

24-73 

1.254 

.209 

450 

4-5 

10 

°7  -5 

3  22  .5 

2645 

1.403 

•234 

460 

4.6 

10 

34-8 

3  31  -6 

7.07 

28  24 

1.566 

.261 

470 

4-7 

11 

02  .7 

3  40  9 

7-54 

30.12 

1-743 

.291 

480 

4.8 

11 

31  .2 

3  5°  4 

803 

32.07 

••937 

•323 . 

490 

4.9 

12 

00.3 

4  00  .1 

8.54 

34- 1 1 

2.146 

•358 

500 

5.o 

12 

3°- 

4  10  . 

9.07 

36-23 

2-374 

•396 

94 


THE  TECHNOGBAPH. 


TABLE  I.— Continued. 


Lcngib 

D 

50.1 

520 

5  -2 

53° 

5  -3 

540 

5-4 

55° 

5  -5 

560 

5.6 

^70 

5-7 

580 

5.8 

SQO 

5-9 

600 

6.0 

610 

6.1 

620 

6.2 

630 

6-3 

640 

6.4 

650 

6-5 

0 


130  00'. 3 

■3  3«  -2 

14  02  .7 

34-8 


14 
•5 

15 
16 


16  49 

17  24 

18  00 


18  36.3 

19  13  .2 

19  5° -7 

20  28.8 

21  07  .5 


40  20l.I 

4  3°  4 

4  4°  9 

4  5i 

t;  02 


13 
24 
36 

48 
00  . 

12  .1 
24.4 

36.9 
49.6 
02  .5 


0 

y 

9-63 

38-44 

10.20 

40.73 

10.80 

43- 12 

11.42 

45-59 

12.07 

48.15 

12.74 

50.69 

1343 

53-56 

14.14 

56.40 

14.89 

59-34 

15.65 

62.39 

16.44 

65-52 

17.26 

68.77 

18.10 

72.11 

18.97 

75-56 

19.87 

79.11 

X  COR  t  COR 

2.6 21 

437 

2.888 

482 

3-175 

53o 

3.486 

582 

3.820 

637 

4.18  | 

697 

4.56  1 

762 

4.98 

83' 

5-42 

905 

5-89 

984 

6.40   I 

069 

6.94  I 

'59 

7.51  I 

2.S5 

8.13  I 

358 

8.78  I 

467 

TABLE   II.     TRANSITION    SPIRAL.     a=io. 


Length 
10 

D 

1  .00 

J 

0 

0 

y 

XCOR 

t  COR 

0 

03 

0 

01 

0.00 

0.00 

0.00 

0.00 

20 

2  . 

0 

12 

0 

04 

.01 

.02 

30 

3- 

0 

27 

0 

09 

.02 

.08 

40 

4- 

0 

48 

0 

16 

•05 

.19 

50 

5- 

1 

•5 

0 

25 

.09 

■36 

60 

6  .00 

1 

48 

0 

36 

.16 

■63 

O.OI 

0.00 

70 

7  • 

2 

27 

0 

49 

•25 

1. 00 

.01 

80 

8  . 

3 

12 

1 

04 

•37 

1.49 

.02 

90 

9  • 

4 

03 

1 

21 

•53 

2.12 

.04 

.01 

100 

10  . 

5 

00 

1 

40 

•73 

2.91 

.08 

.01 

no 

11  .00 

6 

03 

2 

01 

•97 

387 

.12 

.02 

120 

12  . 

7 

12 

2 

24 

1.26 

5.02 

.19 

•03 

•30 

13  • 

8 

27 

2 

49 

1.60 

6.38 

.28 

•05 

140 

14  . 

9 

48 

3 

16 

1.99 

7-97 

■4i 

.07 

150 

>5  • 

11 

«5 

3 

45 

2  45 

9  79 

•58 

.10 

160 

16  .00 

12 

48 

4 

16 

2.97 

11.87 

.80 

■  13 

170 

'7  • 

14 

27 

4 

49 

3-56 

14-23 

1.08 

.18 

180 

18  . 

16 

12 

5 

24 

423 

16.87 

1.44 

.24 

190 

19. 

18 

03 

6 

01 

497 

19  81 

1.88 

•3' 

200 

20  . 

2d 

00 

b 

39/2 

5-79 

23.07 

1  2.42 

.40 

210 

21  .00 

22 

03 

7 

20  >2 

6.70 

26.65 

1  309 

.52 

220 

22  . 

2-4 

12 

8 

03  % 

7.69 

30  58 

389 

•65 

230 

23- 

26 

27 

8 

P 

8.78 

34  86 

485 

.81 

240 

24. 

28 

48 

9 

34  U 

996 

39  49 

599 

1. 00 

250 

25  • 

31 

'5 

10 

23  '-• 

11.24 

44  49 

7-33 

1.23 

TALBOT— RAILWAY  TRANSITION  CURVES. 


95 


TABLE    III.     TRANSITION    SPIRAL.     a=J] 


Length 

D 

J 

H 

0 

y 

a:  COR  / 

COR 

IO 

00. 201 

00 

Oil 

o° 

00  yi 

0.00 

0  00 

0  00        0 

00 

20 

0 .40 

0 

04 

0 

°>  Vi 

.00 

.01 

30 

1  .00 

0 

09 

0 

03 

.01 

03 

40 

1  .20 

0 

16 

0 

05  Vs 

.02 

.06 

50 

1  .40 

0 

25 

0 

oS  '3 

•03 

.12 

60 

2  .00 

0 

36 

0 

12 

.05 

.21 

.00        0 

00 

70 

2  .20 

0 

49 

0 

16  % 

.08 

■33 

80 

2  .40 

1 

04 

0 

21 M 

.12 

•5° 

90 

3  °° 

1 

21 

0 

27 

.18 

•71 

IOO 

3  -2° 

1 

40 

0 

33^ 

.24 

•97 

O.OI 

no 

3  -40 

2 

01 

0 

40  Yi 

•32 

1.29 

.01        0 

00 

120 

4  .00 

2 

24 

0 

48 

.42 

1.68 

.02 

*3° 

4  .20 

2 

49 

0 

56  M 

■53 

2- 13 

•03 

140 

4.40 

3 

16 

1 

05  M 

.67 

2.66 

.05 

01 

150 

5  .00 

3 

45 

1 

15 

.82 

327 

.06 

01 

160 

5  .20 

4 

16 

1 

25^ 

•99 

3  97 

.09 

01 

170 

5  -40 

4 

49 

1 

36  Yi 

1 19 

476 

.12 

02 

180 

6  .00 

5 

24 

1 

48 

1. 41 

565 

.16 

°3 

190 

6  .20 

6 

01 

2 

ooYi 

1.66 

665 

.21 

035 

200 

6  .40 

6 

40 

2 

13  ^ 

1  94 

7-75 

•27 

°5 

210 

7  .00 

7 

21 

2 

27 

2  24 

897 

•35 

06 

220 

7  .20 

8 

04 

2 

41  >i 

258 

10.31 

•44 

07 

230 

7   40 

8 

49 

2 

56>^ 

295 

11.77 

■54 

09 

240 

8  .00 

9 

36 

3 

12 

335 

1338 

.67 

11 

250 

8  .20 

10 

25 

3 

28  M 

37« 

15  11 

■83 

H 

260 

8  .40 

11 

16 

3 

45  >3 

425 

1700 

1. 00 

17 

270 

9  .00 

12 

09 

4 

03 

4.76 

19  02 

1. 21 

20 

280 

9  .20 

13 

04 

4 

2lYi 

531 

21.20 

i-45 

24 

290 

9  -40 

14 

01 

4 

40  Yi 

5  9° 

23  55 

"•73 

29 

300 

10  .00 

15 

00 

5 

00 

6  53 

2605 

2.05 

34 

310 

10  .20 

16 

01 

5 

20  M 

7  20 

28  72 

2  41 

40 

320 

10  .40 

17 

04 

5 

4154 

7  92 

3i  57 

2.83 

47 

330 

11  .00 

18 

09 

6 

03 

869 

34  59     ! 

3  3o 

55 

340 

n  .20 

19 

16 

6 

25 

9  49 

378o     1 

3.82 

64 

350 

11  .40 

20 

25 

6 

48 

1035 

41.19 

4.42 

74 

360 

12  .00 

21 

36 

7 

ny2 

11  25 

44.78 

5.08 

85 

370 

12  .20 

22 

49 

7 

zsU 

12.21 

4856 

582 

97 

380 

12  .40 

24 

04 

8 

00  y2 

13  22 

52  53 

6.65        1 

n 

39° 

13  .00 

25 

21 

8 

26 

14  28 

5671 

7  56        1 

27 

400 

13  .20 

26 

40 

8 

52  M 

15-39 

61.10 

8.58        1 

44 

410 

13  .40 

28 

01 

9 

19  k 

16.56 

6569 

9.69        1 

62      , 

420 

14  .00 

29 

24 

9 

4624 

17  79 

70.49 

10.92        1 

83 

430 

14  .20 

30 

49 

10 

15 

1907 

75  5i 

12.27           2 

06 

440 

14.40 

32 

16 

10 

43^ 

20.41 

80.74 

'3  75        2 

30 

450 

<5  .00 

33 

45 

11 

13 

21.81 

86.19 

1536        2 

58 

-7 


M  THE  TECHNOGRAPH. 

The  transition  spiral  was  probably  first  used  on  the  Pan  Handle 
Railroad  in  1SS1,  by  Mr.  Elliot  Holbrook.  The  principal  part  of 
the  treatment  here  given  was  made  before  the  writer's  attention  was 
called  to  Mr.  Holbrook's  use  of  the  curve,  and  it  is  believed  that 
most  of  the  formulas  and  methods  appear  here  for  the  first  time. 
I'.y  Mr.  Holbrook's  method,  the  deflection  angles  were  always  cal- 
culated from  the  co-ordinates,  .v  and  y, — along  and  tedious  pro- 
cess, especially  if  accurate  results  are  obtained;  and  for  a  transit- 
point  on   a   spiral,  the  deflection  angles   were   calculated   from  tan 

y—y- 

9— • 

x — x. 

If  the  properties  of  the  transition  spiral  were  more  generally 
understood  and  appreciated,  it  would  be  more  largelv  used. 

The  Tapering  Curve. 

The  Tapering  Curve  is  a  compound  curve  consisting  of  a  series 
of  circular  curves  of  the  same  length,  whose  degree  of-curve  in- 
creases by  some  constant  difference  up  to  the  degree  of  the  main 
curve.  Thus,  if  the  taper  is  i°  for  each  30  feet,  the  approach  from 
a  tangent  to  a  6°  curve  will  be  made  by  30  feet  of  i°  curve,  30  feet 
of  20  curve,  30  feet  of  30  curve,  30  feet  of  40  curve,  and  30  feet  of 
50  curve,  after  which  the  6°  curve  is  run  in. 

If  the  degree  of  the  main  curve  is  not  a  multiple  of  the  com- 
mon difference  of  the  tapers,  at  the  end  of  the  last  full  chord  a  frac- 
tional chord  is  used,  proportional  to  the  difference  of  the  degree  of 
the  main  curve  and  last  taper.  Thus,  for  a  taper  of  2  °  30'  per  30 
feet,  an  8 °  curve  would  be  reached  by  30  feet  of  2°  30*  and  30  feet 
of  5  °  curve,  ending  with  6  feet  of  7  °  30'  curve;  since  8°  is  in  ex- 
cess of  70  30'  by  one-fifth  of  the  change  2°  30',  one-fifth  of  a  full 
chord  is  used. 

In  order  to  run  the  curve  with  the  transit  at  the  beginning  of 
the  tapering  curve  or  at  some  corresponding  point — thus  saving 
setting  at  each  P.  C.  C. — a  table  giving  detlection  angles  to  the 
different  P.  C.  C's,  is  used.  The  formulas  for  the  calculation  of 
these  tables  may  be  shown  as  follows: 

In  Fig.  6,  let  AKL  be  a  tapering  curve  composed  of  a  number 
ofecpaal  arcs,  AH,  I  IK,  and  ECL,  and  LS  the  main  curve  which  pro- 
duced backward  to  D  will  give  a  tangent  parallel  to  AP.  Denote 
the  points  of  compound  curve  by  P.  C.  C.  The  following  nomen- 
clature will  be  used: 


TALBOT-BAILWAY  TRANSITION  CUIO  ES. 


97 


-C 


.  fl.1  v'« 


1 

'•a 


Fig.  6. 


Z?=degree  of  the  main  curve,  and  R  its  radius. 

d=  degree  of  arc  of  taper  of  number  denoted  by  subscript. 

r  =  radius,  distinguished  in  the  same  way. 

i  =  central  angle  of  any  arc,  distinguished  in  the  same  way. 

J  =  sum  of  the  central  angles  up  to  a  given  P.  C.  C. 

0  =  deflection  angle  at  P.  T.  C.  to  end  of  any  arc. 

$  =  deflection  angle  at  any  P.  C.  C.  to  end  of  any  arc. 

L  =  total  length  of  the  tapering  curve  (in  stations). 

c—  length  of  chord  of  one  curve  (in  stations). 

n  =  number  of  the  chord  considered,  counting  from  the  P.  T.  C. 
Other  terms  are  as  used  in  the  transition  spiral. 

Since  the  degree  of  the  tapers  increases  in  arithmetical  pro- 
gression, 

A  —  y2n{n-\-\)i.  Also,  since  L-n  c,  A  =  y?  D  L,  and  hence 
the  curve  will  be  twice  as  long  as  the  main  curve  for  the  same  cen- 
tral angle. 

To  find  the  deflection  angle  at  the  P.T.C.,— 


y 

tan  8—-. 


The  values  of  the  co-ordinates  may  be  shown  to  be 


x 


x=ioo(T  [cos   J^+cos  2i\-\- +cos  ^n2/:]  ~c"5>  cos  }£n2t\. 

y=ioo<r  S  sin  l/>rPix.     Whence 


tan  8-. 


sin  VztPi 


cos  y2ni 


fill-:  TECBNOGRAPW. 

The  co-ordinates  may  also  be  expressed  as  follows: 

x=(rt — r,)sin  /,+(>.., — /-3)  sin  (i,-K..) to  n  terms. 

y—{j\ — r2)vers  /j+(r2 — r,)  vers  (ii+i/; to  n  terms. 

The  deflection  angle  at  any  P.C.C.,  between  the  tangent  at  that 
point  and  a  line  to  the  P.T.C   will  be  J — 9. 

The  deflection  angle  to  any  other  P.C.C.  may  be  found  from 

Ji— 7i 

tf= . 

x, — x2 

It  may  be  shown  that 

0=y — R  vers  J. 

t—x — R  sin  J. 

7*=/ +  (*+*)  tan  yzi. 

E  =  (R-\-  o)  exsec  y&Z+o. 

y 
c= . 


sin  H 

From  these  formulas  concise  tables  may  be  computed  for  use 
in  field  work.  In  case  the  degree  of  main  curve  is  not  an  even 
multiple  of  the  constant  increase  of  degree,  these  formulas  will  need 
modification.  The  computation  is  somewhat  tedious,  and  the  inter- 
polation for  partial  chords  can  not  be  made  with  accuracy. 

Tables  IV.  and  V.  give  the  deflection  angles  for  a  change  of  i° 
in  30  feet,  and  for  z°  30'  in  30  feet.  The  columns  are  headed  with 
the  distances  from  the  P.T.C.  To  find  a  deflection  angle  for  the 
transit  at  a  given  distance  from  the  P.T.C,  look  down  the  corres- 
ponding column  for  "transit;"  in  the  same  horizontal  line  with  this 
and  in  the  column  headed  with  the  distance  of  the  required  point 
from  the  P.T.C.  is  the  deflection  angle.  Thus,  for  a  change  of  i° 
in  30  feet,  with  transit  at  1+20,  the  deflection  to  o  is  i°o6',  and  to 
2+10  is  2°  03'.  The  degree  of  the  next  taper,  or  the  degree  of  the 
main  curve  with  which  the  taper  compounds,  is  also  given  opposite 
P.C.C.  0,  t,  and  J  are  for  the  whole  tapering  curve  up  to  a  length 
given  by  the  column  heading.  The  degree  of  main  curve  divided 
by  the  increase  of  degree  will  give  one  more  than  the  number  of 
chords  to  be  used. 

The  field  work  is  similar  to  that  of  the  transition  spiral — except 
that  a  uniform  chord  length  must  be  used — and  need  not  be  de- 
scribed. Some  inconvenience  comes  from  the  necessity  of  taking 
even  chords  and  disregarding  the  usual  station  stakes  on  the  taper, 


TALBO T-RA IL  I \  'A  Y  TR A  NS1  Tl ON  CURV KS.  '. M I 

Table_IV.     i  °  Taper  for  30  feet. 


0 

+3° 

+60 

+9° 

1+20 

1+5° 

1+80 

2-f-IO 

2+40 

2+70 

Transit 

o°  09' 

0°22'^ 

o°42' 

i°ory2 

i°39' 

2°l6*>< 

30  00' 

3°  49'^ 

4°  45' 

o°09' 

Transit 

O    18 

0  40^ 

I  09 

1  43K 

2  24 

3  io# 

4  03 

5  01^ 

0  3^ 

0  18 

Transit 

0  27 

0  58^ 

1  36' 

2  19^ 

3  09 

4  04^ 

5  06 

1  06 

0  49^ 

0  27 

Transit 

0  36 

1   i6y2 

2  03 

2  SS^ 

3  54 

4  58^ 

1  52^ 

1  33 

I  07^ 

0  36 

Transit 

0  45 

1  34J4 

2  30 

3  3i>2 

4  39 

2  51 

2  28^ 

2  00 

1  25^ 

0  45 

Transit 

0  54 

1  52^ 

2  57 

4  07^ 

4  oiy2 

3  36 

3  04^ 

2  27 

1  43)4 

0  54 

Transit 

1  03 

2  io>£ 

3  24 

5.24 

4  nH 

4  21 

3  40J* 

2  54 

2   OI>£ 

1  03 

Transit 

1  12 

2    28J4 

6  58^ 

6  27 

5  49.^ 

5  06 

4  16/2 

3  21 

2  19K 

1    12 

Transit 

1  21 

8  45 

8  io#  7  30 

6  43/2 

5  5i 

4  52^ 

3  48 

2  37J4 

1  21 

Transit 

P.C.C. 

2° 

3° 

4° 

5° 

6° 

7° 

8° 

9° 

IO° 

J 

o°i8' 

o°  54' 

I  48 

3  0O 

4  30 

6  18 

8  24 

10  48 

13  30 

0 

0.03 

0.14 

0.38 

0.77 

1.36 

2.18 

3.28 

4.69 

6-45 

t 

15.01 

30.01 

45  01 

60.00 

74  99 

89.95 

1 04 . 90 

119.80 

134.66 

c 

30.00 

60.00 

90.00 

119.99 

149.96 

179.91 

209.81 

239  63 

26935 

Table  V.     20  30'  Taper  for  30  Feet. 


0 

+30 

-f6o 

o°56X 

0  45'. 

Transit 

0  I3K 

1  07^ 

2  29^ 
2  48M 
5  00 

7  41X 
10  52^ 

+66 

94--0 

i°  45' 
1  4iX 
1  07^ 

l-f-14 

i-f-20 

1+5° 

1+80 

2-f-IO 

Transit 

o°  izy2 

1   \%% 

1  37>3 

2  45 

4  19 
4  41^ 
7  °llA 
10  04 

13  3°)£ 

0  =  22'^ 

Transit 

0  45 

1  02 

2  03% 

3  32 

3  52^ 
6  11X 
9  00 
12  19 

5° 

0  45 

0. 10 
15.00 
30.00 

IO°4'23 

0  55 

0  iVA 
Transit 

20  35' 
2  37 
2  09^ 

2°   AW4 

2    52>4 
2    26X 

4°  07J4 
4  i8# 
4  00 

5°  4i' 
6  00 

5  48^ 

r  29y2 

7  56 
7  52^ 

Transit 

1    12 

1  30 

3  33X 

6  07  J< 

9  "X 

1  12 

Transit 

I    30 

3  »X 

5  oVA 

7  i8# 

Transit 
I  52)4 
4  i8# 
7  15 

1  52>4 
Transit 

2  15 

5  °3K 

15° 
11  15 

3-43 

74.82 

149.76 

3  56X 
2  15 

Transit 
2  37^ 

6  15 
4  4i X 

2  37K 
Transit 

P.C.C. 

J 
0 
t 

c 

7=30' 

2  15 

0.40 
29.99 
60  00 

8  = 
2  42 

o.45 
32.24 

65-99 

IO° 

4  3° 
0  99 

44-97 
89.98 

12° 

6  54 
1.67 

56-44 
"3  94 

I2°30' 

7  3° 
1.97 

59  93 
119.92 

17=30' 
15  45 
548 

89  62 

179  43 

20  ° 
21  00 

8.20 
104.27 

208.8 

but  this  is  not  a  very  serious  drawback.  If  intermediate  points  are 
desired,  a  tape  maybe  stretched  along  the  chord,  and  the  proper  or- 
dinate taken  from  tables  for  the  purpose  and  measured  off  at  the 
desired  point.  Interpolations  in  the  tables  will  not  give  accurate 
results.  30  feet  seems  to  be  preferred  for  the  length  of  chord,  since 
it  is  just  the  length  of  a  rail,  but  50-ft.  chords  would  be  more  ad- 
vantageous in  some  respects. 

The  tapering  curve  was  introduced  by  Mr.  William  Hood,  Chief 
Engineer  of  the  Southern  Pacific  Railway,  and  has  been  extensively 
-8 


THE  TKCHNOGRAPH. 

used  on  the  Southern  Pacific,  Northern  Pacific,  Missouri  Pacific,  and 
other  Western  roads.  It  makes  a  good  transition  curve,  and  does 
not  vary  much  from  the  transition  spiral.  However,  it  lacks  flexi- 
bility, this  property  being  secured  only  by  a  wide  range  of  tapers, 
necessitating  many  tables. 

The   Railroad  Spiral. 

The  Railroad  Spiral,  as  developed  by  Wm.  H.  Searles,  C.  E..  is 
a  multiform  compound  curve,  differing  from  the  tapering  curve  by 
using  the  central  angles  of  the  successive  arcs  as  constant  quantities, 
and  varying  the  length  of  arc  or  chord  to  secure  different  spirals. 
The  first  arc  has  10'  central  angle,  the  second  20',  the  third  30',  and 
so  on  to  the  end  of  the  transition  curve.  Mr.  Searles  has  published 
a  little  hand-book  of  tables  and  explanations  for  this  curve.  Tables 
of  deflection  angles  with  the  transit  at  any  chord  point  are  given. 
These  deflections  are  constant  whatever  the  chord  length.  Thus,  the 
deflection  to  the  end  of  the  8th  chord  is  2  ~~  07',  whether  the  length  of 
curve  be  S  x  10  feet  or  S  X  21  feet,  and  the  central  angle  subtended 
will  also  be  the  same.  However,  the  degree-of-curve  of  the  arcs 
will  vary  with  a  change  in  length  of  chord.  This  necessitates  a  set 
of  tables  giving  the  degree-of-curve  for  the  last  chord  in  the  curve. 
As  this  is  not  an  integral  number,  the  one  nearest  the  degree  of  the 
main  curve  is  chosen.  This  is  allowable,  since  it  consists  in  com- 
pounding the  last  arc  with  the  main  curve.  As  several  chord  lengths 
with  the  corresponding  number  of  chords  will  give  about  the  same 
degree-of-curve,  a  variety  of  spirals  for  any  main  curve  is  secured. 
About  sixty  tables  are  given  in  Searles'  "The  Railroad  Spiral,"  to 
which  the  student  is  referred  for  further  information. 

The  "railroad  spiral"  approaches  very  near  the  true  transition 
spiral.  With  the  tables  given,  the  calculations  and  field  work  are 
simple  and  rapid.  Deflections  for  points  between  the  chord  points 
are  found  by  interpolating  in  the  tables,  but  only  chord  points  may 
be  used  as  transit-points.  An  objection  has  been  made  that  the 
degree-of-curve  for  any  chord  is  not  an  integral  multiple  of  the 
number  of  the  chord.     This,  however,  is  not  of  great  importance. 

Other  Meti; 

The  Cubic  Parabola. — The  Cubic  Parabola  is  a  curve  whose 
ordinate  from  the  tangent  varies  as  the  cube  of  the  distance  from 
the  P.  C,  measured  along  the  tangent.     Its  equation  isv  = 


TALBOT    RAILWAY  TRANSITION  CURVES  101 

being  a  constant.  Within  a  small  limit,  the  degree  of  curve  varies 
nearly  as  the  distance  along  the  tangent,  and  J  as  the  square  of  this 
distance.  Hence,  within  this  limit,  the  curve  approaches  closely  to 
the  true  transition  spiral;  in  fact,  all  its  valuable  prope  ties  for  a 
railway  transition  cu"ve  are  approximations  of  the  transition  spiral. 
As  soon  as  x  differs  materially  from  the  length  of  curve,  a  correc- 
tion has  to  be  made,  otherwise  the  curve  must  be  laid  out  by  ordi- 
nates  from  the  tangent,  a  very  objectionable  method.  The  radius 
of  curvature  finally  begins  to  increase.  Many  attempts  have  been 
made  to  utilize  this  curve,  but  both  field  work  and  computations  are 
too  intricate  and  inconvenient  if  the  curve  has  any  considerable 
length,  and  it  has  no  advantage  over  the  transition  spiral. 

The  Pennsylvania  Method. — The  Pennsylvania  Railroad  uses 
200  feet  of  30'  curve  at  the  ends  of  a  simple  curve.  For  sharp  curves 
100  feet  of  r  curve  is  put  in  at  either  end.  The  superelevation 
begins  with  zero  at  the  P.C.,  and  increases  uniformly  to  the  full 
amount  at  the  beginning  of  the  main  curve.  The  claim  is  made  that 
in  this  manner  the  complete  super-elevation  is  attained  while  the  car 
is  on  a  light  curve  where  the  wheels  keep  to  the  outer  rail,  and  that 
the  shock  incident  to  gaining  the  super-elevation  while  on  the  tan- 
gent is  avoided.  Of  course,  the  field  work  is  simple.  It  is  claimed 
that  this  method  is  very  efficient,  but  it  is  open  to  criticism. 

Methods  of  Track-men. — When  simple  curves  are  left  with- 
out transition  curves,  many  track-men  "ease"  the  curve  by  throwing 
the  P.  C.  inward  a  short  distance  and  gradually  approaching  the 
tangent  a  few  rail-lengths  away,  while  the  main  curve  is  reached 
finally  by  sharpening  the  curve  for  a  short  distance.  Even  this  is 
better  than  no  easement  curve. 

Another  simple  method  consists  in  utilizing  one  of  the  proper- 
ties of  the  transition  spiral.  In  Fig.  1,  page  — ,  let  ABK  be  the 
original  track  line,  B  being  the  P.  C.  At  some  point  in  the  curve  a 
convenient  distance  from  the  P.  C,  say  100  feet,  throw  the  track 
inward  any  distance  to  L.  At  B,  the  old  P.  C,  throw  the  track  to 
E  a  distance  half  as  great.  Measure  back  from  the  P.  C.  an  equal 
distance,  100  feet,  to  A  for  the  beginning  of  the  easement.  Between 
A  and  L,  line  the  track  by  eye.  The  remainder  of  the  main  curve 
must  then  be  thrown  inward  the  same  distance  as  at  L.  On  long 
curves,  the  latter  work  would  make  the  method  objectionable. 


THE   TECHNOGRAPH. 

5ION. 

\n  examination  of  these  methods  will  show  that  the  transition 
spiral  possesses  the  requirement  that  the  degree-of-curve  shall  in- 
crease uniformly  along  the  spiral,  and  that  the  tapering  curve  and 
Searles'  railroad  spiral  meet  the  requirements  to  a  sufficient  degree. 
The  transition  spiral  and  the  railroad  spiral  are  extremely  flexible, 
but  the  former  has  been  shown  to  have  some  advantages  over  the 
latter.  An  advantage  is  claimed  for  the  tapering  curve  that  when 
30  feet  is  taken  for  the  chord  length  the  rails  when  previously  bent 
will  fit  the  separate  arcs;  thus,  for  a  change  of  2  °  30'  for  each  30 
feet,  the  first  rail  may  be  bent  for  a  20  30'  curve,  the  second  for  a 
5  :,  the  third  for  a  7  °  30'  curve,  etc.  As  the  first  joint  on  the  curve 
may  come  a  half  rail  length  from  the  P.  T.  C,  the  claim  for  ac- 
curacy is  not  strictly  true,  while  for  fiat  tapers  it  is  of  little  import- 
ance. With  the  spiral,  an  average  curvature  for  the  rail-length  may 
be  chosen.  In  any  event,  the  lining  will  easily  throw  the  track  to 
proper  centers. 

In  the  matter  of  field  work  and  computations,  the  transition 
spiral  as  outlined  in  the  preceding  pages  is  preferable  to  either  of 
the  others.  It  may  be  used  with  any  main  curve,  even  if  of  frac- 
tional degree;  any  length  of  chord  may  be  used  in  measurement 
under  the  same  restrictions  as  circular  curves;  and  the  deflections 
and  co-ordinates  to  a  point  not  at  the  end  of  the  common  chord 
may  be  accurately  and  quickly  found.  If  a  more  compact  form  of 
table  is  desired,  giving  the  deflection  angles  from  points  on  the 
spiral,  a  table  of  the  form  and  size  given  for  tapering  curves  on 
page  100  may  be  prepared.  The  writer  believes  that  the  ordinary 
transit-man,  with  a  little  thought  and  study,  can  understand  and 
use  the  transition  spiral  as  easily  as  circular  curves,  and  that  the 
advantages  of  this  method  are  such  that  if  they  were  more  generally 
known  it  would  be  more  generally  used. 

Most  of  the  usual  formulas  of  the  various  location  problems, 
like  "Required  to  change  the  P.  C.  so  that  the  curve  may  end  in  a 
parallel  tangent,"  may  be  used  without  modification  with  curves 
having  transition  endings,  by  simply  considering  the  whole  inter- 
section angle  including  the  angle  in  the  spirals.  This  is  true  when- 
ever the  same  amount  of  spiral  is  used  with  the  new  curve.  If  the 
degree  of-curve  changes  and  with  it  the  length  of  the  spiral,  the 
difference  between  the  </s  in  the  two  cases  must  be  allowed  for. 
With  a  littte  practice  in  using  such  formulas  with  spirals,  the  engi- 
neer will  find  no  difficulty. 


TALBOT— RAILWAY  TRANSITION  CURVES.  103 

The  objection  is  sometimes  raised  that  even  if  track  is  laid  out 
with  a  carefully  fitted  spiral  there  would  be  no  possibility  of  keeping 
it  in  place  by  the  methods  of  the  ordinary  track-man.  This  iden- 
tical objection  could  be  made  with  the  same  force  against  carefully 
laid  out  circular  curves,  yet  no  engineer  would  recommend  abolish- 
ing that  practice.  Even  if,  in  re-lining,  the  transition  curve  is  con- 
siderably distorted,  it  remains  an  easement,  and  will  be  in  far  better 
riding  condition  than  a  distorted  circular  curve.  By  marking  the 
P.S.  and  the  P.C.C.  with  a  stake  or  post,  with  possibly  on  long  spi- 
rals an  intermediate  point,  the  track-man  will  be  able  to  keep  the 
spiral  in  as  good  condition  as  though  it  were  of  uniform  curvature. 

Properly  constructed  spirals  would  frequently  allow  the  use  of 
sharper  curvature — since  the  riding  quality  of  curves  may  be  the 
governing  consideration  in  the  selection  of  a  maximum — and  thus 
make  a  saving  in  construction.  By  fitting  curves  with  proper  tran- 
sition spirals,  roads  using  sharp  curves  may  partially  relieve  the  ob- 
jection of  the  public  to  traveling  by  their  routes.  The  transition 
curve  has,  then,  a  financial  value  largely  overbalancing  its  cost.  The 
adoption  of  such  curves  by  many  of  our  principal  railways  proves 
their  efficiency,  and  the  future  will  see  a  much  more  general  adoption. 


UNIVERSITY  OF  ILLINOIS 


beaming    and    Liabor. 


THE  COLLEGE  OF  ENGINEERING 


Mechanical    Engineering,    Electrical    Engineering, 

Civil  Engineering,  Mining  Engineering, 

and  Architecture. 

Department  is  furnished  with  a  large  and  constantly  growing  equipment  forpracti- 
perlmcutaJ,  and  laboratory  Instn  that  theoretical  investigation  and  practical 

.-,.•11  ii 1 11  \   constant!)    supplement  each  other.      Vmong  tlie  special  features  maybe 
enumerated  thi    Machine  ->im|>  with  examples  of  nil   rorms  of  machine  and  hand  tools, 
tpers,  drills,   •  tli«*  Hlacksmlth  Shop,  t  ii  *-  Foundry,  the    Pat- 

tarn  Shop,  the  «  ;»t -pi'iiti'i-  Shop,  rnllj  equipped  for  nil  Instruction  in  woodwork,  join 
ery,  turning,  carvin  i  he  Civil  Knglneers  have  an  excellent  outfit  of  all 

forma  of  field   Instruments,   including  a  Troughton  a.  Sims  12-inch  Theodolite,  and  transits, 
plane  tables,  compasses,  and  all  udjuncts  nf  the  latest  and  m<>-t  approved  construction. 
Bridge  bnlldii  ■    instruction  of  railways,  highways,  streets,  paving,  sewerage, 

ngth  of  materials. 
The  i  niversit)  does  not  undertake  to  secure  employment,  but  has  taken  great  j»h in-  to 
place  It*  rhe  reputation  of  Its  engineers   Is  constantl)   growing, 

and  foi  demand      ■  her  trained  students  has  in-  exeeeded  her  power  of 

supply.    'I'll'  >f  Illinois  Include!  nd  rourteen  distinct  courses  In 

Fur  fnriliiT  information   ndd 


Urbanj,  May    is,  1801 


DR.  s.  //.  PBABODY,  Recent, 

P.    0.,    Champaign,    II I  i  no  i 


ADVERTISEMENTS. 


The  Thompson-Houston  Electric  Co. 

Arc  and   Incandescent  Electric  Lighting  Appar- 
atus.   Electric  Motors  and 

ELECTRIC  RAILWAY  EQUIPMENT. 


Alternating  Current  Dynamo. 

fHE  SUPERIORITY  OF  OUR  APPARATUS  is  acknowledged 
by  all  Practical  Electric  Lighting  men,  and  is  used  by  more 
Central  Lighting  and  Power  Stations  than  any  others.  Catalogues 
and  estimates  furnished  on  application. 

PRINCIPAL  OFFICE,  620  Atlantic  Ave.,  Boston,  Mass. 

WESTERN   OFFICE,  148    Michigan  Ave.,  Chicago,  III. 


i  l>\i:in  ISEMENTS 


Send  notices  of  letrings.or  bridge  estimates  required. 
ZENAS  KING.  President,  n-tnrr   Q     KXlilTity,  JAS.A.KING,VicePrest. 


HARLErB.GIBBS.TREAS. 
H.W.KINGSccrctary. 


'  A.H.PORTER. 
F.C  05BORN.I 


GRAND  AVENUE  VIADUCT   ST.  LOUIS,  MO.  SUPERSTRUCTURE   STEEL. 
spam  «o  iter.   »"nnoK«  n.ANS  iKo  t  i[T  rAcx.     ro»o*A<  so  rctT  a  inches.     ciorwAus  e  rcrte  ischc^  t«h, 

IRON  AND  STEEL  EYE  BARS.  GIRDER5  AND  STRUCTURAL  WORK. 

PLANS   AND    ESTIMATE    AND    SURVEYS    FREE    OF    CCCT. 


AD)  ERTISEMEKTS. 


BUFF  &  BERGER, 

IMPROVED 

Engineering  and  Surveying  Instruments 

NO.  9  PROVINCE  COURT,  BOSTON,  MASS. 


They  aim  to  secure  in  their  Instruments:  Accuracy  of  division;  simplicity  in 
manipulation;  lightness  combined  with  strength;  achromatic  telescope,  with  high 
power;  steadiness  of  adjustments  under  varying  temperatures;  stiffness  to  avoid 
any  tremor,  even  in  a  strong  wind:  and  thorough  workmanship  in  every  part. 

Their  instruments  are  in  general  use  by  the  U.  S.  Government  Engineers, 
Geologists,  and  Surveyors;  and  the  range  of  instruments,  as  made  by  them  for 
River,  Harbor,  City,  Bridge,  Tunnel,  Railroad  and  Mining  Engineering,  as  well 
as  those  made  for  Triangulation  or  Topographical  Work,  and  Land  Surveying, 
etc.,  is  larger  than  that>of  any  other  firm  in  the  country. 

Illustrated  Manual  and  Catalogue  sent  on  Application. 


Edge  Moor  Bridge  Works 

DESIGN    AND    MANUFACTURE 

Railway  Bridges,  Viaducts,  and  Roofs,  in  Steel  and  Iron 

Tensile    Members    forged    without    welds,    piles,   or   buckles. 

Compressive  Members  manufactured   by  processes  which 

insure  an   entire  absence  of  constructional  strains. 

Wrought-lron    Turn    Tables,   with   centers   of 

Conical  Steel  Rollers  and  Steel  Plates. 


Main  Office  and  Works:  EDGE  MOOR,  on  DELAWARE  RIVER. 

F>     O  ,  WILMINGTON,    DEL 

IIknhv  G.  Mobbb,  President    Wu.  Seiakbb,  Wee-President     Wu.  P\  Ssllsbs,  Secretary 
Wm.  II.  Conttbll,  Treasurer.     P.  B.  Hbislke,  Purchasing   Ig 


iv  ADVERTISEMENTS. 

OUTPUT  DAILY  200  TONS. 

m  A  n  i  i  a  CT  ikis  l^P  ^  )       V 1  j  m  rj  op  A 

Fire  Brick,       «e^ng|         Linings, 
Sewer  Pipe,  ffcj||l      Flue  Pipe, 
Gas  Retorts, 


Ohimney  Tops. 


Prices  Furnished  on  Application  for  Material  on  Contracts. 


EVENS    &    HOWARD'S 

FIRE  BRICK  AND  SEWER  PIPE 

Are  used  by  all  the  leading  dealers  and  consumers  throughout  the  West,  and 
that  their  excellence  is  gaining  for  them  new  friends  daily  is  shown  by  the 
increased  demands  supplied  by  them.     Write  for  descriptive  circulars. 


EVENS  &  HOWARD,  St.  Louis,  Mo. 


A  D  VERTISEMEX  TS. 


Engineering  New5     1 

and  ? 

American  Railway  Journal 


n>,i/*,„..,„<iHli »i»|)>*. i.ilA» vj*^ 


^  •  THERE  IS  NO  QUESTION  . 
-jlkal"  te  all  p^rliey  having  Corilfad's  Tu- 
i  fKere  is  absolulely  r\o  meiKod  on 
'eartKso  quick  ir\  oclron  .50  545)  far/or/./^ 
■  To  everybody  as  dn  adverfistmenr  i 
1     ENGINEERING  NEWS- 
I    All  tfre  ENTERPRISlNGo-y^ 
l  RESPONSIBLE  CONTRACTOR/ f 
'"  '  ill  5E£  Ami  READ  it-      j^£ 


MONEY  MVED  IS 
MOfEY  EARNED! 

Eosfon  Pi.,MarcKl7.lW0 
Engineering  Newj: 
I  6m  very  much  pleased,  wilk  iKt  advertise - 
enl"  in  ENCINtTRlNC  NEWS    our  cil'y  has 
"\  a  srear  earner  by  if.  as  I  am  fully  Satis 


l«r25' 


iKtrcfrom" 


mftPPfSSil   OFAMEBICA:       R  *G  W°  f°r+™ 


^IH        nvJRNALOF  AMERICA 

1  faA«  ■&£ LARGE5T  circul^t|on 

^^THEEHC,mRiNCF,EL0 

WJJT  TH°B-owCHL-V 


SAMPLE  COPY 
FREE. 


PUBLI5H/NCCQ 


a 


& 


GEO.  M.  EDDY  &  CO., 


MANUFACTURERS    OF 

Measuring  Tapes  for  all  Purposes. 

345  TO  343  CLASSON  AVENUE.  BROOKLYN  N.  Y. 

Steel  Tapes  of  all  kinds,  for  Engineering  purposes,  a  specialty.  Also,  light  Steel  Standard 
Measures,  one-eighth  inch  wide,  graduated  each  live  or  ten  feet,  with  Reel  for  rough  work : 
will  not  break;  warranted  TJ.  S.  Standard  Measure.     Send  tor  catalogue. 


ADVERTISEMENTS. 


HEER   <*   SEELIG, 

192-94  E.   MADISON   ST.,  CHICAGO. 

Manufacturers  of  First  Class  and   Latest  Improved 

ENGINEERING,  SURVEYING,  and  MINING 

INSTRUMENTS. 


The  most  carefully  made  instruments  at  prices  lower  than  those 
of  any  maker  of  good  repute.  Accuracy  of  graduation  unsur- 
passed.    Definition  of  telescope  very  superior. 

Each  Instrument  is  Guaranteed  in  Every  Respect. 


Write  for  new  and  Illustrated  Catalogue.  Mention  this  publication. 


MEACHAM  &  WRIGHT, 

MANUFACTURERS'    \.I\i-   for 

Utica  Hydra  ulicCement 


AND    DEALERS    IN 


Portland  and  Louisville  Cements,  Lime, 
Michigan  and  New  York  Stucco. 

98  Market  Street.  CHICAGO. 

TELEPHONE     ■4^3't. 


ADVERTISEMENTS. 


Architects  and  Draughtsmen,  Read 


SOMTEHING  NEW.     SOMETHING  USEFUL. 


Transparent  Triangles,  Curves,  and  "T"  Squares. 

A  new  article  which  has  now  been  in  use  about  one  year, 
and    has    proven    itself    absolutely    indispensable    to 
Draughtsmen.       Its    value    as    a   convenience    and 
necessity   has   been    acknowledged    by   every  one 
who  has  seen  or  used  these  articles.     They  will 
allow    of    more    rapid    and    accurate    work 
owing  to  their  transparency;  they  do  not 
assimilate   dust;    they  are    nearly   un- 
breakable; they  keep  their  edges  like 
metal    tools;    in    fact    they   have 
every     possible     advantage     over 
wood  and  rubber,  and  it  will  pay  you  to  give  them  a  trial. 


WE  CARRY  THE  MOST  COMPLETE  LINE  OF 

Engineers  and  Draughtmans  Supplies 

IN    THE    iA£EST. 


Send  for  illustrated  Catalogue   and  Sample  Book  of 
Drawing  Paper.     Correspondence  solicited. 


Western  Agents  for  Dean's  Adjustable  T  Squares. 


A.  S.  ALOE  &  CO., 

Manufacturers  and  Importers  of  Mathematical  Instruments,  Drawing 
Materials,  Papers,  Etc. 


415    N.   BROADWAY. 


ST.    LOUIS,    MO 


IDVERTISEM1 


LOUISVILLE  CEMENT 


The  undersigned  is  General  Agent  for  the  following  Standard 
Brands  of  Louisville  Cement: 

FALLS   MILLS  (J.   HLL.ME  BRAND) 

SPEED  MILLS.  FALLS  CITY  MILLS. 


BLACK  DIAMOND  MILLS  (RIVER). 


QUEEN  CITY  MILLS.  ACORN   MILLS. 


BLACK  DIAMOND  MILLS  (RAILROAD). 
FERN  LEAF  MILLS.  EAGLE  MILLS. 


This  Cement  has  been  in  general  use  throughout  the  West  and 
South  since  1830,  most  of  the  public  works  having  been  constructed 

with  it. 


Orders  for  Shipments  to  any  part  of  the  Country,  by  Rail 

or  Water,  will   receive   Prompt  and 

Careful  Attention. 


SALES  FOR  1890,  1,533,864  BARRELS. 


WESTERN  CEMENT  ASSOCIATION 

247  W.   Main  Street,   Louisville,   Ky. 


ADVERTISEMENTS. 

D.  H.  LLOYDB  &  SON, 


THE    LEADING 


Booksellers  •  and .  Stationers  •  of .  Champaign .  County. 


THE   LHRG6ST   STOCK  OF 


Keuffel  &  Esser's  Drawing  Materials 

and  Draughting  Instruments  in  the  State,  outside  of  Chicago. 


We  make  a  Specialty  of  Scientific  Books. 

Foreign   Books  Imported. 


SPECIAL    AGENTS    FOR 

Prof.    I.    0.    Baker's    "Masonry   Construction,"    Fifth    Edition. 


We  invite  correspondence  in  regard  to  any  Books  or  Draughting 
Supplies  that  an  Engineer  may  want. 

ORDERS     PROMPTLY    F=H-L.eD. 


THE    STUDENTS    HEADQUARTERS 

a.  P.  cUHHiHGHfMW  &  soH, 

25    MAIN    STREET. 

Books  and  Drugs. 

We  make  a  specialty  of  the  Keuffel  &  Esser  Company's 

Fine   Drafting  Instruments,   Drawing   Papers, 

Inks,  Scales,  etc.,  at  New  York  Prices. 


A.  G.  Spaulding  &  Brothers'  Base  Ball  and  Athletic  Goods,  Tennis 
Rackets  and  Nets,  all  at  manufacturers  prices. 


You  can  always  find  the  best  Cigars  in  the  market.     News  Depot. 
STUDBNTS    TRA.UB    SOLICITED. 


ADVERTISEMENTS. 


i  X1"HJC<'S 


Civil  Engineer's 

Pocket  Book. 

"Beyond  all  Question  the  best  practical  manual  for  the  engineer 
that  has  ever  appeared." — Manual  for  Railroad  Engineers, 
by  Prof.  George  L.   lose,  C.  E. 

Railroad  Curves. 

Excavations  and  Embankments. 


■JOHN  WILEY  Jb  SONS.   Sen-  York. 

E.  «  r.  X.   SI'ON,  LoikIoii 


•J.  W.  HOLIES,    M 


BATAVIA,    N.    Y. 

MAN!  FACTURER    OF 


Engineers'  and  Surveyors'  Instruments. 

PATENTEE  OF  THE  SOLAR  THEODOLITE. 


Instruments  Carefully  Repaired  and  Adjusted. 


ADVERTISEMENTS. 


YOUNG  &  SONS, 

ESTKBLISHED     1820. 

.    .    .    MANUFACTURERS    OF    .    .    . 

Engineering,  Mining,   *  * 
*  *  Surveying  Instruments. 

No.  43  North  Seventh  Street, 

PHILHDELPHIH. 


THE  DBANB, 

OF    HOLYOKE, 

STEAM  PUMPS 


WATER  WORKS 

ErlGIfiES 

Send  for  new  Illustrated  Cata 
logue  to 

Deane  Steam  Pump  Co, 

HOLYOKE,  MASS. 


New  York,  Boston,  Chicago,  Philadelphia,  St.  Louis,  Denver,  Birmingham. 


M>\  ERTlSEMEb  TS. 


Grafton  Quarry  Company 


DEALERS    IN    ALL    KIND.-,    OF 


GRAFTON  STONE 

OFFICE,  415   LOCUST  ST.,   ROOM  504 

SAINT  LOUIS. 


QUARRIES  AT  GRAFTON,  JERSEY  GO.,  ILLINOIS. 


Extract  from  the  report  of  Capt.   James  B.  Eads,  Chief  Engineer  Illinois  and  St. 

Louis  Bridge  Co.,  October,    1870,  in  regard  to  a  test  made  of  a  specimen  of 

stone  from  the  Grafton  quarries.     He  says: 

"  It  is  remarkably  strong.  Many  tests  of  its  comparative  strength  have  been 
made  in  the  company's  testing  machine,  where  its  resistance  has,  in  many  instan- 
ces, exceeded  17,000  pounds  per  square  inch,  which  is  equal  to  that  of  granite. 

"  A  curious  fact  has  been  developed  by  these  tests,  which  is  that  the  modulus 
of  elasticity  of  this  stone  is  about  the  same  as  that  of  wrought  iron.  That  is,  a 
given  weight  placed  upon  a  wrought  iron  column  and  upon  a  column  of  the 
Grafton  stone  of  the  same  size,  will  produce  an  equal  shortening  in  both;  while 
the  elastic  limit  (or  breaking  point)  of  the  stone  is  not  far  below  the  limit  at  which 
the  wrought  iron  would  be  permanently  shortened.  A  column  of  the  stone  two 
incl  s  in  diameter  and  eight  inches  long  was  shortened  under  compression  in  the 
the  testing  machine  nearly  one-quarter  of  an  inch  without  fracturing  it.  When 
the  strain  was  removed  the  piece  recovered  its,  original  length." 


From  the  Geological  Survey  of  the  State  of  Illinois.     Mr.  Peattens  analysis  of  a 
specimen  of  Grafton  stone: 

Insoluble  matter 5.60 

Carbonate  of  lime 47-79 

Iron  and  alumina 1. 40 

Carbonate  of  magnesia 42.86 

Water  and  loss 2.35=100 


JAMES  BLACK,  President,  and  JOHN   S.?  ROPER,  Secy.,  St.  Louis,  Mo. 
CHAS.   BRAINERD,  Superintendent,  Grafton,  111. 


The  Pioneer  Electrical  Journal  of  America. 

THE  ELECTRIGAL  WORLD 

Read  Wherever  the  English  Language  is  Spoken. 

Th;    '  .1  i.->   the   la  gest,   most  handsomely   illustrated,  and 

circulated  electrical  journal  in  the  world.  It  should  be  read  by  every 
ambitious  electrician  anxious  to  rise  in  his  profession.  The  paper  is  ably  edited 
and  is  noted  for  explaining  electrical  principles,  and  describing  new  in\< 
and  discoveries  in  simple  and  eas\  language,  devoid  of  technicalities.  It  also 
gives  promptly  the  most  complete  ne'.i  s  from  all  parts  of  the  world,  relating  to 
telegraphy,  telephony,  and  electric  lighting. 

A  Special  cable  dispatch  from  The  Electrical  World's  own  correspondent  in 
London  appears  in  each  issue,  giving  the  latest  electrical  news  in  Europe  up  to 
date.  No  other  technical  journal  in  the  world  goes  to  this  expense.  No  one  who 
desires  to  keep  abreast  of  the  wonderful  activity  in  electrical  discovery  and  inven- 
tion that  characterizes  our  times,  can  afford  to  miss  The  World  for  a  single  issue. 

BOOKS  ON  ELECTRICAL  SUBJECTS. 

There  is  no  work   relating   to   electricity  that  we  do  not  either  publi 
Books  promptly  mailed   to  any  address,  postage   prepaid,  on  receipt  of  the 
Catalogue  and  information  Mree. 

PATENTS  FOR  ELECTRICAL  INVENTIONS. 

Telegraphic    ami    electrical   cases  a  specialty.       Work,    fust    class.        R 
I  able.      N<>  charge  for  advice   by  mail,  or  for  consultation.     Correspondence 
solicited. 

HOUSTON'S  ELECTRICAL  DICTIONARY. 


"The   most  valuable  of  atiy  single  book  belonging  to  tlie  literature  of  dec - 
tniiy."     This  new  and  important  work  is  designed  to  meet  the  universal 
and  growing  need  of  a   handy   volume,    giving   in    plain    and    simple   langu 
clear,  concise  definition  of  the  exact  meaning  of  the  many  terms  embraced  in  the 
y  of  Electricity.     It  contains  short,  succinct  definitions  of  about  2,500 
distinct  words,  terms,  or   phrases,    followed  by  a  general  statement  of  the  princi- 
electrical  science  on  which  such  definitions  are  founded.     655  pagi 
loth.      I'ri. 

Copies  of  the  Dictionary,  01   of  an)   other  hook  or  hooks,  mailed,   po 

iipt  of  the  price.      Address  the 

W.  J.  JOHNSTON  COMPANY,  Limited, 

167-177   "Times"   Building,   New  York.